Agilent Technologies Computer Hardware E1300B User Manual

75000 SERIES B  
Mainframes  
E1300B and E1301B  
User’s Manual  
Copyright © Agilent Technologies, Inc., 1989, 1990, 1991, 2006  
Manual Part Number: E1300-90005  
Microfiche Part Number: E1300-99005  
Printed: February 2006  
Printed in U.S.A.  
Edition 3  
E 0206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Certification  
Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory. Agilent Tech-  
nologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Tech-  
nology (formerly National Bureau of Standards), to the extent allowed by that organization’s calibration facility, and to the calibration  
facilities of other International Standards Organization members.  
Warranty  
This Agilent Technologies product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from date of  
shipment. Duration and conditions of warranty for this product may be superseded when the product is integrated into (becomes a part  
of) other Agilent products. During the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will, at its option, either repair or replace products which  
prove to be defective.  
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies. Buyer shall pre-  
pay shipping charges to Agilent and Agilent shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all  
shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent from another country.  
Agilent warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent for use with a product will execute its programming instructions  
when properly installed on that product. Agilent does not warrant that the operation of the product, or software, or firmware will be un-  
interrupted or error free.  
Limitation Of Warranty  
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied prod-  
ucts or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or im-  
proper site preparation or maintenance.  
The design and implementation of any circuit on this product is the sole responsibility of the Buyer. Agilent does not warrant the  
Buyer’s circuitry or malfunctions of Agilent products that result from the Buyer’s circuitry. In addition, Agilent does not warrant any  
damage that occurs as a result of the Buyer’s circuit or any defects that result from Buyer-supplied products.  
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Agilent SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
Exclusive Remedies  
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. Agilent SHALL NOT BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CON-  
TRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.  
Notice  
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Agilent Technologies MAKES NO WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Agilent shall not be liable for errors contained herein or  
for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material. This document contains  
proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, repro-  
duced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Agilent Technologies, Inc. Agilent assumes no responsibil-  
ity for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Agilent.  
U.S. Government Restricted Rights  
The Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as "commercial  
computer software" as defined in DFARS 252.227- 7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May 1991) or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun  
1995), as a "commercial item" as defined in FAR 2.101(a), or as "Restricted computer software" as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun  
1987)(or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those rights provided for such  
Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the Agilent standard software agreement for the product in-  
volved.  
Agilent E1300B and E1301B Mainframes Service Manual  
Edition 3 Rev 2  
Copyright © 1992-2006 Agilent Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing History  
The Printing History shown below lists all Editions and Updates of this manual and the printing date(s). The first printing of the man-  
ual is Edition 1. The Edition number increments by 1 whenever the manual is revised. Updates, which are issued between Editions,  
contain replacement pages to correct the current Edition of the manual. Updates are numbered sequentially starting with Update 1.  
When a new Edition is created, it contains all the Update information for the previous Edition. Each new Edition or Update also in-  
cludes a revised copy of this printing history page. Many product updates or revisions do not require manual changes and, conversely,  
manual corrections may be done without accompanying product changes. Therefore, do not expect a one-to-one correspondence be-  
tween product updates and manual updates.  
Edition 1 (Part Number E1300-90001). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . October 1989  
Edition 2 (Part Number E1300-90002). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1990  
Edition 3 (Part Number E1300-90005). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . November 1991  
Edition 3 Rev 2 (Part Number E1300-90005) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February 2006  
Trademark Information  
Microsoft® and MS-DOS® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM® and PC-DOS® are U.S. registered trade-  
marks of International Business Machines Corporation. DEC® , VT100® , and VT220® are registered trademarks of Digital Equip-  
ment Corporation. WYSE® is a registered trademark or Wyse Technology. WY-30 is a trademark of Wyse Technology.  
Macintosh® is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc.  
Safety Symbols  
Instruction manual symbol affixed to prod-  
uct. Indicates that the user must refer to the  
manual for specific WARNING or CAU-  
TION information to avoid personal injury  
or damage to the product.  
Alternating current (AC).  
Direct current (DC).  
Indicates hazardous voltages.  
Indicates the field wiring terminal that must  
be connected to earth ground before operat-  
ing the equipment—protects against electri-  
cal shock in case of fault.  
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or  
condition that could cause bodily injury or  
death.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or con-  
dition that could possibly cause damage to  
equipment or permanent loss of data.  
Frame or chassis ground terminal—typi-  
cally connects to the equipment’s metal  
frame.  
or  
WARNINGS  
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product.  
Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,  
manufacture, and intended use of the product. Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply  
with these requirements.  
Ground the equipment: For Safety Class 1 equipment (equipment having a protective earth terminal), an uninterruptible safety earth  
ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable.  
DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or fumes.  
For continued protection against fire, replace the line fuse(s) only with fuse(s) of the same voltage and current rating and type.  
DO NOT use repaired fuses or short-circuited fuse holders.  
Keep away from live circuits: Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields. Procedures involving the removal  
of covers or shields are for use by service-trained personnel only. Under certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the  
equipment switched off. To avoid dangerous electrical shock, DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless  
you are qualified to do so.  
DO NOT operate damaged equipment: Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into this product have been im-  
paired, either through physical damage, excessive moisture, or any other reason, REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until  
safe operation can be verified by service-trained personnel. If necessary, return the product to an Agilent Technologies Sales and Serv-  
ice Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.  
DO NOT service or adjust alone: Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering first aid  
and resuscitation, is present.  
DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment: Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute  
parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product. Return the product to an Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office  
for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014  
Manufacturer’s Name:  
Agilent Technologies, Inc.  
Loveland Manufacturing Center  
Manufacturer’s Address:  
815 14th Street S.W.  
Loveland, Colorado 80537  
declares, that the product:  
Product Name:  
Model Number:  
Product Options:  
75000 Series B VXI Mainframe  
Agilent E1300B/E1301B  
All  
conforms to the following Product Standards:  
Safety:  
IEC 1010-1:1990+A2:1996/EN61010-1:1993  
Canada: CSA 556B  
UL 3111  
EMC:  
CISPR 11:1990/EN55011:1991: Group 1, Class A  
EN61000-3-2:1995: Class A  
EN50082-1:1992  
IEC 801-2:1991: 4kV CD, 8kV AD  
IEC 801-3:1984: 3V/m  
IEC 801-4:1988: 0.5kV Signal Lines, 1kV Power Line  
ENV50141:1993/prEN50082-1:1995: 3Vrms  
ENV50142:1994/prEN50082-1:1995: 1kV CM, .5kV DM  
EN61000--4-8:1993/prEN50082-1:1995: 3A/m  
EN61000-4-11:1994/prEN50082-1:1995: 30%, 10ms:60%, 100ms  
Conforms with the following European Directives: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the  
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and carries the "CE" marking accordingly.  
May 7, 2001  
Ray Corson, Product Regulations Program Manager  
European contact: Your local Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office or Agilent Technologies GmbH,  
Department HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Straße 130, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany (FAX +49-7031-14-3143).  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Agilent 75000 Series B Documentation  
Manual Descriptions  
Installation and Getting Started Guide. Contains step-by-step instructions for  
all aspects of plug-in module and mainframe installation. This guide also  
contains introductory programming information and examples.  
Agilent E1300B/E1301B Mainframe User’s Manual. Contains programming  
information for the mainframe, front panel operation information (for the  
Agilent E1301B mainframe), and general programming information for  
instruments installed in the mainframe.  
Plug-In Module User’s Manuals. Contains plug-in module programming and  
configuration information. These manuals contains examples for the most-used  
module functions, and a complete TMSL command reference for the plug-in  
module.  
Installation and Getting  
Started Guide  
Instrument Applications*  
Using the Mainframe front panel or pacer  
Plug-in Module User’s  
Manuals  
Mainframe User’s  
Manuals  
* For Scanning Voltmeter Applications, refer to the Agilent E1326A/E1411A 5 1/2 Digit  
Multimeter Users Manual.  
Suggested Sequence for Using the Manuals  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Related Documents  
Agilent Instrument BASIC User’s Handbook. Includes three books: Agilent  
Instrument BASIC ProgrammingTechniques , Agilent Instrument BASIC  
Interfacing Techniques, and Agilent Instrument BASIC Language Reference.  
Using Agilent Instrument BASIC with the E1405. Contains information on the  
version of Agilent Instrument Basic which can be installed in ROM in your  
E1405B Command Module.  
Beginner’s Guide to SCPI. Explains the fundamentals of programming  
instruments with Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI).  
We recommend this guide to anyone who is programming with TMSL for the  
first time.  
Tutorial Description of the General Purpose Interface Bus. Describes the  
technical fundamentals of the General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). This  
book also includes general information on IEEE 488.2 Common Commands.  
We recommend this book to anyone who is programming with IEEE 488.2 for  
the first time.  
IEEE Standard 488.2-1987, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols, and  
Common Commands. Describes the underlying message formats and data types  
used in TMSL and defines Common Commands. You may find this document  
useful if you need to know the precise definition of certain message formats,  
data types, or Common Commands. Available from: The Institute of Electrical  
and Electronic Engineers, Inc.; 345 East 47th Street;  
New York, NY 10017; USA  
VXIbus System Specifications. Agilent part number E1400-90006.  
The VMEbus Specification. Available from: VMEbus International Trade  
Association; 10229 N. Scottsdale Road, Suite E; Scottsdale, AZ 85253; U.S.A.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Manual  
Manual Content  
This manual shows how to use the Agilent E1300/E1301 Mainframe and how to  
operate and program instruments within the mainframe using SCPI (Standard  
Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands and IEEE 488.2  
Common Commands. For installation and configuration information refer to the  
"Agilent 75000 Series B Installation and Getting Started Guide".  
Chapter 1: This chapter contains a mainframe description, discusses the instrument  
Getting Started  
concept, and contains introductory programming examples.  
Chapter 2: Using the This chapter describes how to use the Agilent E1301 mainframes front panel  
Front Panel  
keyboard and display to operate instruments in the mainframe.  
Chapter 3: Using the Display This chapter describes how to use a display terminal to operate instruments in  
Terminal Interface  
the mainframe.  
Chapter 4: Using the This chapter shows how to use the mainframes Pacer, how to change the  
Mainframe  
primary GPIB address, and how to synchronize internal and external  
instruments using the mainframes Trigger In and Event Out ports.  
Chapter 5: Downloading This chapter contains information on downloading device drivers into  
Device Drivers  
non-volatile memory using both GPIB and RS-232 connections.  
Chapter 6: Controlling This chapter shows some general concepts for operating instruments in the  
Instruments using GPIB  
mainframe using IEEE 488.2 Common Commands and the GPIB interface.  
Chapter 7: The command reference contains a detailed description of each System  
Command Reference  
Instrument command. It includes information on the choice of settings and  
examples showing the context in which the command is used. It also contains  
command references for the supported IEEE 488.2 Common Commands and  
IEEE 488.1 GPIB Messages.  
Appendix A: Specification This appendix contains a list of the Mainframes operating specifications.  
Appendix B: This appendix lists SCPI error codes and messages for the System Instrument,  
Error Messages  
and possible causes.  
Appendix C: Connecting & This appendix shows how to set-up a terminal for use with the Display Terminal  
Configuring a Terminal  
Interface described in Chapter 3.  
Appendix D: Sending Binary This Appendix contains information on transferring binary files over an RS-232  
Data Over RS-232  
interface. It includes information on how these files are coded for transmission.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1. Getting Started  
Using This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Mainframe Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Optional Mainframe Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Instrument Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Instrument Logical Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Instrument Secondary Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Unassigned Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Introductory Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
2. Using the Front Panel  
Using this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Front Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
A 60-Second Menu Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Using the System Instrument Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Using the Other Instrument Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Executing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Key Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Menu Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Display Control & Editing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Instrument Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Other Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Instrument Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
3. Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Using this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Terminal Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
A 60-Second Menu Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Using the System Instrument Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Using the Other Instrument Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
3-11  
Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Executing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
General Key Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Menu and Menu Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Editing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Instrument Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15  
Other Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15  
Table of Contents - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Supported Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
The Supported Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Using the HP 700/22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Using the WYSEØ WY-30œ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Using Other Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
What “Not Supported” Means . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Testing Terminals for Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Using a Terminal Without Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21  
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23  
Instrument Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
4. Using the Mainframe  
Using this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using the Pacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Changing the Primary GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Synchronizing Internal and External Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Mainframe Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Using Mainframe Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Non-Volatile User Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Allocating a User Memory Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Locating the NRAM segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Using :DOWNload and :UPload? to Access Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Data Formats for :DOWNload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
5. Downloading Device Drivers  
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
What You Will Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Download Program Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Editing the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Downloading Drivers in MS-DOS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Downloading Drivers in GPIB Systems with IBASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Downloading Drivers in GPIB Systems with BASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Downloading Multiple Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Checking Driver Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Manually Downloading a Driverdown manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Preparing Memory for Manual Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Manually Downloading Over GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Manually Downloading Over RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
6. Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Programming Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Status System Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
The Status Byte Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Reading the Status Byte Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Service Request Enable Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
2 - Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Service Request Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
Clearing the Service Request Enable Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
Standard Event Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
Unmasking Standard Event Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
Reading the Standard Event Status Enable Register Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Reading the Standard Event Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Operation Status Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Reading the Condition Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Unmasking the Operation Event Register Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Clearing the Operation Event Register Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Using the Operation Status Group Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Clearing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Interrupting an External Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Synchronizing an External Computer and Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
7. System Instrument Command Reference  
About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Common Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
SCPI Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Linking Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
SCPI Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
ABORt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
DIAGnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
INITiate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29  
[SOURce] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30  
STATus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32  
SYSTem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35  
TRIGger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51  
VXI 7-54  
Common Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65  
*CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66  
*DMC < name_string> , < command_block> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66  
*EMC < enable> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66  
*EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66  
*ESE < mask> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66  
*ESE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67  
*ESR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67  
*GMC? < name_string> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67  
*IDN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68  
*LMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68  
*LRN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68  
*OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69  
*OPC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69  
*PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69  
*PSC < flag> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69  
*PSC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69  
*RCL < state number> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70  
*RMC < name_string> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70  
*RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70  
*SAV < state number> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70  
Table of Contents - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*SRE < mask> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70  
*SRE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71  
*STB? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71  
*TRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71  
*TST? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71  
*WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71  
GPIB Message Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72  
Go To Local (GTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72  
Group Execute Trigger (GET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72  
Interface Clear (IFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72  
Device Clear (DCL) or Selected Device Clear (SDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73  
Local Lockout (LLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73  
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74  
Serial Poll (SPOLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74  
Command Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75  
A. Specifications  
Mainframe Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Pacer (50% duty cycle): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Real-time Clock: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Trigger Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Non-volatile added memory storage lifetime: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Slots: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
EMC, RFI, Safety: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Power: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Cooling: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Humidity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Operating temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Storage temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
SCPI Conformance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Switchbox Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Multimeter Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
Counter Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6  
D/A Converter Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8  
Digital I/O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9  
System Instrument Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10  
B. Error Messages  
Using This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Reading an Instruments Error Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Error Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Execution Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Device-Specific Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Query Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Start-up Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
4 - Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C. Connecting and Configuring a Display Terminal  
Using this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Connecting a Terminal to the Mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Configuring a Terminal for the Mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Starting with Default Mainframe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Restoring the Default Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Configuring the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Trying it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Configuring the Mainframe with Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
D. Sending Binary Data Over RS-232  
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
Formatting Binary Data for RS-232 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
Sending Binary Data Over RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
Setting Up the Mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
Table of Contents - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 - Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Getting Started  
Using This Chapter  
This chapter describes the Agilent E1300B/E1301B Mainframe, defines the  
instrument concept, and explains how plug-in modules are designated as  
instruments in the mainframe. This chapter also contains introductory  
programming examples showing how to read and set the mainframes clock and  
calendar. This chapter contains the following sections:  
Mainframe Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Instrument Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Introductory Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
1
Mainframe  
Description  
The Agilent E1301B mainframe contains a front panel keyboard and display; the  
Agilent E1300B has no keyboard or display. Otherwise, there is no conceptual  
difference between the two mainframes. Both models provide a terminal based  
user interface (Display Terminal Interface) through the built-in, or optional  
plug-in serial interfaces. The front panel keyboard and display are discussed in  
Chapter 2 of this manual. The Display Terminal Interface is discussed in  
Chapter 3.  
The mainframe handles such high level operations as language translation of  
IEEE-488.2 Common Commands and SCPI (Standard Commands for  
Programmable Instruments) commands; module-to-module synchronization;  
and memory management. When installed in the mainframe, SCPI-compatible  
register-based plug-in modules behave as independent instruments operating  
under control of SCPI commands and Common Commands. Plug-in modules  
that are not SCPI-compatible must be programmed at a register level (see the  
VXI:REG:WRITE and VXI:REG:READ? commands in Chapter 5 of this  
manual for more information). Figure 1-2 shows the E1300B/E1301B  
Mainframes A- and B-size plug-in module slots, GPIB* connector, RS-232 port,  
and input/output ports.  
Optional Mainframe The mainframe comes from the factory with 256 kBytes of non-volatile memory  
(RAM) for reading storage. You can install up to 2 MBytes of optional RAM.  
Memory  
The E1320A provides 500 kBytes while the E1321A provides 1 MByte of  
memory. Optional RAM replaces the standard memory and is not in addition to  
it (e.g. the mainframe with an optional 1 Mbyte module has 1Mbyte available).  
*
GPIB is the implementation of IEEE Std 488.1-1978.  
Getting Started 1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GPIB  
Trig Out: Allows an instrument to output a negative-going pulse to indicate the  
occurrence of some event such as closing a channel on a Switchbox Instrument.  
The signal levels are standard TTL (0V to 5V). This pulse can be used to  
synchronize external equipment to the instrument (see Chapter 5 for examples).  
You direct the pulse from the appropriate instrument to the Trig Out port using  
the OUTP:STAT ON command.  
Pacer Out: Allows you to output a square wave signal to trigger or pace external  
equipment such as scanners or voltmeters. You can control the period of the  
square wave signal and the number of periods output. The signal levels are  
standard TTL (0V to 5V). Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 for more information on  
the Pacer.  
Event In: Allows an instrument to be armed or triggered from an external  
negative-going signal. The signal levels are standard TTL (0V to 5V). Use an  
instruments ARM:SOUR:EXT command or the TRIG:SOUR:EXT command  
to direct the Event In port to that instrument.  
RS-232: Serial interface provides a user interface using a terminal or a  
computer running terminal emulator software. The user interface provides the  
functionality of the E1301s keyboard and display. If present, the optional  
IBASIC interpreter can be configured to control the RS-232 port.  
Figure 1-1. Mainframe Features  
1-2 Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Instrument  
Definition  
SCPI-compatible plug-in modules installed in the mainframe are treated as  
independent instruments each having a unique secondary GPIB address. As  
shown in Figure 1-3, each instrument is assigned a dedicated error queue, input  
and output buffers, status registers and, if applicable, dedicated mainframe  
memory space for readings or data. An instrument may be composed of a single  
plug-in module (such as a counter) or multiple plug-in modules (for a Switchbox  
or Scanning Voltmeter Instrument). In addition, the mainframe contains a  
built-in instrument called the System Instrument which has a Pacer for timing  
external devices. The System Instrument also can control the built-in RS-232, as  
well as up to seven optional Agilent E1324A plug-in serial interfaces.  
Figure 1-2. Instrument Concept  
Getting Started 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Logical Instruments are identified by a logical address which directly relates to its GPIB  
secondary address. Instruments come from the factory with a preset logical  
address. You can change the factory setting during installation (see the "Agilent  
75000 Series B Installation and Getting Started Guide" for instructions).  
Addresses  
A single-module instrument must have its logical address set to an integer  
multiple of 8 (0, 8, 16, 24, ... 240). In a multiple-module instrument, only one of  
the modules has a logical address that is an integer multiple of 8. The other  
modules in the multiple-module instrument must have consecutive logical  
addresses. For example, in a Scanning Voltmeter, if the voltmeter module has a  
logical address of 16, the other modules in that instrument must have logical  
addresses of 17, 18, 19 and so on. The same applies to the System Instrument  
whos logical address fixed at 0. An E1324A plug-in serial interface controlled  
by the System Instrument would be set to logical address 1. A second E1324A  
would be set to logical address 2 and so on.  
Instrument Secondary An instruments GPIB secondary address is simply the logical address divided  
by 8 (for a multiple-module instrument, the lowest logical address divided by 8).  
Addresses  
For example, an instrument with a logical address of 16 has a secondary address  
of 02. The secondary address allows access to a particular instrument when  
programming via GPIB. (The System Instruments secondary address is 00 and  
is the only address that cannot be changed).  
Unassigned Modules  
An unassigned module in an E1300B/E1301B Mainframe is one that does not  
have a logical address that is a multiple of 8 (8, 16, 24...240) and is not part of a  
Scanning Voltmeter or Switchbox configuration. You can only program these  
modules at the register level using the VXI:WRITE and VXI:READ?  
commands (see Chapter 5 of this manual for more information on these  
commands).  
1
Introductory  
Programming  
Examples  
This section shows how to send SCPI and Common Commands to the  
mainframes System Instrument and how to read data back. The following  
assumes that you send the commands or read the data over GPIB. To send SCPI  
commands or to read data, specify the:  
Computers GPIB interface address  
Mainframes GPIB primary address  
Instruments GPIB secondary address  
SCPI command string or Common Command  
For instruments in the mainframe, the primary address is the same as the  
mainframe address (i.e., the factory setting is 09). The instruments secondary  
address is simply the logical address divided by 8 (e.g., logical addresses of 8, 16,  
24, or 32, result in secondary addresses of 01, 02, 03, or 04, respectively).  
1-4 Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example: Reading the Time This program reads and prints the time from the System Instruments internal  
clock. The computer used in the example is an Agilent Series 200/300 computer  
with Agilent BASIC as the program language. The computer interfaces to the  
mainframe using the General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). The GPIB  
interface select code is 7, the GPIB primary address is 09, and the GPIB  
secondary address is 00 (System Instrument). Resulting in a combined address  
of 70900.  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*RST"  
20 OUTPUT 70900;"SYST:TIME?"  
30 ENTER 70900; H,M,S  
Reset System Instrument using  
Common Command  
Send SCPI query command to  
return time  
Place hour in H, minutes in M,  
seconds in S  
40 PRINT H,M,S  
50 END  
Print time  
Typical response: + 16, + 15, + 30 (4:15:30 PM)  
Example: Setting the Time Set the clock using the 24 hour hour,minute,second format. Execute the  
following line to set the time to 14,00,00 (i.e., 2:00:00 PM).  
SYST:TIME 14,00,00  
Example: Reading the Date This program reads and prints the date stored in the mainframes internal  
calendar.  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"SYST:DATE?"  
20 ENTER 70900; Y,M,D  
Send SCPI query command to  
return date  
Place year in Y, month in M,  
day in D  
30 PRINT Y,M,D  
40 END  
Print date  
Typical response: + 1989, + 9, + 16 (September 16, 1989)  
Example: Setting the Date  
Set the date using the YYYY,MM,DD format. Executing the following line sets  
the date to 1990,1,13 (January 13, 1990).  
SYST:DATE 1990,1,13  
Getting Started 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6 Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Using the Front Panel  
Using this Chapter  
This chapter shows you how to use the Agilent E1301B Mainframes front panel  
keyboard and display to operate instruments in the mainframe. It contains the  
following sections:  
Front Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Using Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Executing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Key Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
In Case of Difficulty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Instrument Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
1
Front Panel  
Features  
Figure 2-1 shows the front panels QWERTY keyboard and the dedicated key  
groupings. The tutorials in this chapter show how to use most of the dedicated  
keys. See “Key Descriptions” near the end of this chapter for a complete  
description of each dedicated key.  
Display Control and  
2-Line X 40 Character Display  
Menu Keys  
Editing Keys  
Agilent  
Instrument  
Control Keys  
QWERTY Keyboard  
Figure 2-1. Front Panel Features  
Using the Front Panel 2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Using Menus  
You can access a System Instrument menu and a variety of other instrument  
menus (depending on installed instruments) from the front panel. These menus  
incorporate the most used functions but do not provide access to all of the  
instrument commands. If a particular function is not available from a menu, you  
can type the corresponding command string and execute it from the front panel.  
See “Executing Commands” later in this chapter for more information.  
When you select an instrument, you are assigning the keyboard and display to  
that instrument. This means that any menu operations, commands executed or  
recalled, errors displayed, etc. pertain only to that instrument. Front panel  
operation of an instrument is independent from other instruments and  
independent from the remote operation of the instrument. To operate another  
instrument from the front panel, you must select that instrument.  
Note: Typical instruments shown. Actual choices depend on installed instruments  
Figure 2-2. Select an Instrument Menu  
A 60-Second Menu Following the power-on sequence or a system reset the display shows the Select  
an instrument menu (see Figure 2-2) which lets you select one of the instruments  
listed.  
Tutorial  
The menu keys are located directly below the display. To select a displayed  
menu choice, press the function key (f1 - f5) directly below the choice. This  
chapter shows key labels in bold text.  
When there are more than five menu choices, an arrow appears on the  
right side of the display. Press More to display the next group of choices.  
By repeatedly pressing More you can display all groups of choices. After  
you have displayed all groups of choices, pressing More again returns to  
the first group of choices.  
When the display is requesting information (input prompt) such as Enter  
the device’s logical address, just type the information and press Return.  
If you press the wrong menu key and do not want to enter the  
requested information, you can escape the input prompt and stay at  
the same menu level by pressing ESC or Prev Menu.  
If you make an incorrect entry in response to an input prompt, the  
top line of the display will show an error message. When this  
happens, just select that menu choice again (f1 - f5 keys), re-type the  
correct information, and press Return.  
2-2 Using the Front Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press Prev Menu to return to the previous menu within an instrument  
menu or escape from an input prompt. Press Select Instr to return to the  
Select an Instrument menu. Note that when you leave an instrument and  
return later, you return to the same menu location you were when you  
left. In addition, any other displayed information (instrument responses  
or commands being entered) will also be displayed when you return.  
In addition to the menu keys, Clear Instr and Reset Instr are helpful  
when operating an instrument. Clear Instr clears the instruments front  
panel input and output buffers (remote buffers are not cleared) and  
returns to the top level of the instrument menu. Press Clear Instr  
whenever an instrument is busy, is not responding to front panel control,  
or to abort a command being entered from the front panel. Reset Instr  
clears all front panel and remote input and output buffers and resets the  
instrument.  
Using the System The System Instrument menu allows you to:  
Instrument Menu  
Set or read the system GPIB address  
Reset (reboot) the mainframe  
Display the logical addresses of installed instruments  
Display information about installed instruments  
How to Set or Read the System GPIB Address  
GPIB  
GPIB  
GPIB  
Using the Front Panel 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Reset the System  
GPIB  
Note: The RESET menu selection is equivalent to the DIAG:BOOT command which has the same effect as cycling power to the mainframe.  
Pressing Reset Instr from the System Instrument menu is equivalent to executing the *RST command which resets the System Instrument.  
How to Display Logical Addresses or Instrument Information  
GPIB  
2-4 Using the Front Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Other The instrument menus allow you to access the most-used instrument functions  
or to monitor an instrument (monitor mode) while it is being controlled from  
Instrument Menus  
remote. Well use the Switchbox menu to show you how to use the instrument  
menus. Menus are available for many but not all instruments. See “Instrument  
Menus”, later in this chapter, for more information on a particular instruments  
menu. The Switchbox menu allows you to:  
Open and Close Channels  
Scan Channels  
Display Module Type and Description  
Monitor a Switchbox  
Reset a selected switch module  
Selecting the Switchbox To select the Switchbox, press the function key (f1 - f5) directly below the word  
SWITCH in the “Select an instrument” menu. (If the “Select an instrument”  
menu is not being displayed press Select Instr.)  
Note  
After you press the function key below the word SWITCH, the top line of the  
display may show: “Select SWITCH at logical address:_” while the bottom line of  
the display lists two or more logical addresses. This means more than one  
Switchbox is installed in the mainframe. To select one of the Switchboxes, press  
the function key directly below the corresponding logical address.  
The charts on the following pages show how to use the Switchbox menu. Keep  
the following points in mind when using the menu:  
The card number identifies a module within the Switchbox. The module  
with the lowest logical address is always card number 01. The module  
with the next successive logical address is card number 02 and so on.  
The @ character is required preceding a channel list when executing a  
Switchbox command from the front panel or remote. When entering a  
channel list in response to a menu prompt however, do not precede it  
with the @ character. Doing so causes a syntax error.  
Using the Front Panel 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Open/Close Channels  
How to Scan Channels  
2-6 Using the Front Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Display Monitor Type, Description, or Reset Module  
How to Select Monitor Mode  
Using the Front Panel 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitor Mode Monitor mode displays the status of an instrument while it is being controlled  
from remote. Monitor mode is useful for debugging programs. You can place an  
instrument in monitor mode using front panel menus, or by executing the  
DISP:MON:STAT ON command from the front panel or by remote. (Executing  
the remote DISP:MON:STAT ON command is the only way to assign the  
display/keyboard to an instrument from remote.) Pressing most front panel keys  
will automatically exit monitor mode and return to the instrument menu.  
However, you can use the left and right arrow keys in monitor mode to view long  
displays.  
Note  
Enabling monitor mode slows instrument operations. If the timing or speed of  
instrument operations is critical (such as making multimeter readings at a  
precise time interval), you should not use monitor mode.  
Table 2-8 shows the status annunciators that may appear in the bottom line of  
the display in monitor mode. Some instruments also have device-specific  
annunciators (see the plug-in module manual for more information).  
Table 2-1. Monitor Mode Display Annunciators  
Annunciator  
Description  
mon  
bsy  
err  
The instrument is in monitor mode  
The instrument is executing a command  
An error has occurred (see “Reading Error  
Messages” below)  
srq  
A service request has occurred  
Reading Error Messages Whenever the display is showing the err annunciator, an error has occurred for  
the instrument being monitored. You can read the error message, although  
doing so cancels monitor mode. To read an error message, press the following  
keys:  
The error message will be displayed in the top line of the display. To see if  
another error was logged, repeat the above keystrokes or press:  
After you have read all the error messages, executing the SYST:ERR?  
command causes the display to show: + 0 No error. After reading the error  
message(s), press f1 to return to monitor mode.  
2-8 Using the Front Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Executing  
Commands  
From the front panel, you can type and execute IEEE 488.2 Common  
Commands and SCPI Commands for the instrument presently selected by the  
Select an instrument menu. (However, you cannot execute a command when the  
display is requesting that you input information.) This is particularly useful for  
accessing functions not available in an instruments menu. For example, the  
System Instrument contains a Pacer that can be programmed to output a square  
wave signal on the mainframes Pacer Out port. From the System Instrument  
menu, you can program the Pacer to output 10 square wave cycles with a period  
of 1 second each by typing the following commands and pressing Return after  
each command (see Chapter 3 for more information on the Pacer).  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 10  
SOUR:PULS:PER 1  
INIT:IMM  
TRIG:SOUR IMM  
As another example, after selecting the Switchbox, suppose you must set up and  
execute a scan list with automatic advance (automatic advance is not available  
from the menu). You can do this by typing the following command string and  
pressing Return (notice that by linking the commands together with a semicolon  
and colon you need press Return only once).  
TRIG:SOUR IMM;:SCAN (@100:105);:INIT  
Editing The display editing keys (shown on the following page) allow you to edit  
user-entered data or commands. When editing, the display is in insert mode.  
That is, typed characters will be inserted into the string at the present cursor  
position.  
Using the Front Panel 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Key Descriptions  
This section explains the function of each of the front panels dedicated keys. If  
a key is not functional in a particular situation, pressing that key does nothing  
except to cause a beep. Users of the optional IBASIC interpreter should refer to  
their IBASIC manual set for additional editing functions.  
Menu Keys  
Selects the menu choice displayed directly above each key.  
Returns to the Select an instrument menu.  
Returns to the previous menu level within an instrument menu or escapes from  
an input prompt. When you reach the top of an instruments menu, pressing  
Prev Menu does nothing except to cause a beep.  
The display can show a maximum of five menu choices at a time. When there are  
more than five menu choices, an arrow appears on the right side of the display.  
Press More to display the next group of choices. By repeatedly pressing More  
you can display all groups of choices. After you have displayed all groups of  
choices, pressing More again returns to the first group of choices.  
Recalls the last command entered from the front panel. After recalling a  
command, it can be edited or re-executed. You can recall from a stack of  
previously executed commands by repeatedly pressing Recall Prev. When you  
reach the bottom of the stack (the last line in the buffer), pressing Recall Prev  
does nothing except to cause a beep. Pressing Shift with Recall Prev recalls the  
last SCPI command generated by a menu operation. For example, reading the  
time using the menus (SYSTEM, TIME, READ) generates and executes the  
SCPI command SYST:TIME?. A recalled command can be executed by  
pressing the Return key. You can also edit a recalled command before you  
execute it.  
Accesses commands in the opposite order to that of Recall Prev. Pressing Recall  
Next does nothing until you have pressed Recall Prev at least twice.  
Performs the same function as Prev Menu.  
Display Control &  
Editing Keys  
(Right arrow key.) Moves the cursor one character space to the right while  
leaving characters intact. Use the right arrow key to scroll displays that are  
longer than the display size. Pressing Shift followed by the right arrow key  
moves the cursor to the end of the line. Pressing CTRL followed by the right  
arrow key moves the cursor 4 character spaces to the right.  
(Left arrow key.) Moves the cursor one character space to the left while leaving  
characters intact. Use the left and right arrow keys to scroll displays that are  
longer than the display size. Pressing Shift followed by the left arrow key moves  
2-10 Using the Front Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the cursor to the beginning of the line. Pressing CTRL followed by the left  
arrow key moves the cursor 4 character spaces to the left.  
Erases the character at the present cursor position (for user-entered data only).  
Erases the character to the left of the cursor (for user-entered data only).  
(Clear-to-end key.) Erases all characters from the present cursor position to the  
end of the input line (for user-entered data only). Pressing Shift followed by the  
clear-to-end key erases the entire line and moves the cursor to the beginning of  
the line.  
Selects the upper-case alphabetic characters or the character shown on the top  
half of a key. You can either hold down Shift while pressing another key or press  
and release Shift and then press another key.  
Sets all alphabetic keys to uppercase (capitals); does not affect the other keys.  
To return to lowercase, press Caps Lock again.  
Instrument Control  
Keys  
Resets only the selected instrument (equivalent of executing *RST). Reset Instr  
also clears the instruments front panel and remote input and output buffers.  
Reset Instr is the only front panel key that can affect an instrument being  
operated from remote.  
Clears the front panel input and output buffers (remote buffers are not cleared)  
of the selected instrument and returns to the top level of the instrument menu.  
Press Clear Instr whenever an instrument is busy, is not responding to front  
panel control, or to abort a command being entered from the front panel.  
Other Keys  
End of line. Enters your responses to menu prompts. Executes commands  
entered from the front panel keyboard.  
Selects alternate key definitions. You can either hold down CTRL while pressing  
another key or press and release CTRL and then press another key. These  
CTRL key sequences provide short-cuts for some menu key sequences as well as  
additional functions not directly available from dedicated front panel keys. For  
a complete list of all CTRL key sequences see table 3-3 in the next chapter.  
Using the Front Panel 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
In Case of Difficulty  
Problem:  
Problem Cause/Solution:  
Error -113 undefined header error occurs after entering For some commands used by the menus, the data  
data in response to a menu prompt.  
entered is appended to a command header. For  
example, if you enter "1"as the port number for a digital  
I/O module, the command used is  
DIG:HAND1:MODE NONE where HAND1 indicates  
the port number. If your entry was invalid or incorrect,  
error -113 occurs.  
Following the power-on sequence or system reset the  
display shows:  
An unnassigned device (incorrect logical address) was  
detected, or the contents of non-volatile memory may  
have been lost, If you cycle power or perform system  
reset, the display will show the logical address of the  
unassigned device. You can also check the logical  
addresses using the CONFIG? -- LADDS branch of the  
System Instrument menu. Refer to Chapter 1 of this  
manual for a discussion of logical addresses and  
unassigned devices.  
Configuration errors. Select SYSTEM  
Press any key to continue_  
The display shows: "instrument in local lockout".  
The front panel has been locked-out (GPIB local  
Menus seem to work but nothing happens when I reach lockout). You can re-enable menu operation by  
the bottom level or try to execute a command.  
cancelling local lockout (from remote) or by cycling  
mainframe power.  
Display cannot be removed from monitor mode.  
Monitor mode was entered from remote  
(DISP:MON:STAT ON command) and the front panel  
has also been locked out (GPIB local lockout). Either  
cancel the local lockout or execute  
DISP:MON:STAT OFF (from remote).  
Display shows:  
A hardware or software problem has occured in the  
instrument preventing it from responding to front panel  
control.  
Can not connect to instrument  
Press any key to continue_  
After selecting an instrument the display shows:  
The instrument is busy performing an operation. Press  
Clear Instr to abort the instrument operations and  
allow the front panel to access the instrument.  
busy.  
Display shows:  
The instrument has already been selected from the  
Display Terminal Interface. An instrument can only be  
“attached” to one display at a time. At the terminal,  
return to the “Select instrument” menu. The instrument  
can now be selected from the Front Panel.  
Instrument in use by another display.  
Press any key to continue_  
2-12 Using the Front Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Instrument Menus  
This section contains charts showing the structure and content for all front panel  
instrument menus. Also shown in the charts are the SCPI or Common  
Commands used and descriptions of menu-controlled instrument operations.  
This section contains the following charts:  
System Instrument Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Switchbox Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16  
Scanning Voltmeter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
Agilent E1326A 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Agilent E1328A 4-Channel D/A Converter Menu. . . . . . . . . . 2-21  
Agilent E1330A Quad 8-Bit Digital I/O Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22  
Agilent E1332A 4-Channel Counter/Totalizer Menu . . . . . . . 2-24  
Agilent E1333A 3-Channel Universal Counter Menu. . . . . . . 2-26  
Using the Front Panel 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
Using the Front Panel 2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-18 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-20 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-22 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
Using the Front Panel 2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-24 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-26 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
2-28 Using the Front Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Using this Chapter  
This chapter shows you how to use the Agilent E1300B and Agilent E1301B  
MainframesDisplay Terminal Interface (terminal interface) to operate  
instruments in the mainframe. The terminal interface uses the built-in RS-232  
and/or the optional Agilent E1324A Datacomm Module to provide all of the  
features of the Agilent E1301Bs front panel, plus comfortable keyboard  
position and full screen display. It contains the following sections:  
Terminal Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Using Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Executing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
General Key Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Using Supported Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Using Other Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
In Case of Difficulty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23  
Instrument Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Note  
This chapter discusses usingthe display terminal interface. It assumes that you  
have already connected your terminal and configured it to communicate with  
your mainframe. For information on connecting and configuring your terminal,  
refer to Appendix C in this manual.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Terminal Interface  
Features  
Figure 3-2 shows a typical terminal interface display with its function labels  
across the bottom of the screen. The first five function keys (f1 through f5) select  
instrument menu choices. Function keys f6 through f8 provide menu control and  
access to utility functions. The tutorials in this chapter show how to use most of  
the menu control and utility function keys. See “General Key Descriptions” near  
the end of this chapter for a complete description of each of these key functions.  
Instrument Label  
Text Output Area  
Command Entry Line  
Input Line  
Prompt Line  
Notes: 1. Example screens are from HP AdvanceLink terminal emulator.  
2. Later screen examples are shown compressed (only 4 lines tall)  
and may show only part of the screen width.  
Figure 3-1. Typical Terminal Interface Display  
3-2 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Using Menus  
A System Instrument menu and a variety of other instrument menus (depending  
on installed instruments) are available from the terminal interface. These menus  
incorporate the most used functions but do not provide access to the complete  
functionality of an instrument. If a particular function is not available from a  
menu, you can type the corresponding Common Command or SCPI command  
string and execute it from the terminal interface. See “Executing Commands”  
later in this chapter for more information.  
When you select an instrument, you are assigning the terminal interface to that  
instrument. This means that any menu operations, commands executed or  
recalled, errors displayed, etc. pertain only to that instrument. Terminal  
interface operation of an instrument is independent from other instruments and  
independent from the remote operation of the instrument. To operate another  
instrument from the terminal interface, you must select that instrument.  
Note: Typical instruments shown. Actual choices depend on installed instrument  
Figure 3-2. "Select an instrument"Menu  
A 60-Second Menu Following the power-on sequence or a system reset, the screen shows the Select  
an instrument menu (see Figure 3-2). This menu allows you to select one of the  
instruments listed.  
Tutorial  
The menu select and menu control function keys (usually labeled f1 - f8 on their  
key caps) are defined by eight function labels located across the bottom of the  
terminal screen. Once you learn how these keys operate, using the menus is easy  
(key labels are shown in bold text in this chapter):  
To select a displayed menu choice, press the function key (f1 - f5) which  
corresponds to the function key label.  
When there are more than five menu choices, function key f6 becomes  
labeled MORE. Press MORE to display the next group of choices. By  
repeatedly pressing MORE you can display all groups of choices. After  
you have displayed all groups of choices, pressing MORE again returns to  
the first group of choices.  
Whenever the screen is requesting information (input prompt) such as  
Enter the devices logical address, just type the information and press  
Return (may be Enter on a terminal emulator).  
If you pressed the wrong menu key and do not want to enter the  
requested information, you can escape the input prompt and stay at the  
same menu level by pressing ESC or PRV_MENU.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you make an incorrect entry in response to an input prompt, the  
bottom line of the Text Output Area will show an error message. When  
this happens, just select that menu choice again (f1 - f5 keys), re-type the  
correct information, and press Return.  
Press PRV_MENU or ESC to return to the previous menu within an  
instrument menu or escape from an input prompt. Press SEL_INST to  
return to the Select an Instrument menu (see next item). Note that when  
you leave an instrument and return later, you return to the same menu  
location you were when you left. In addition, any information below the  
Text Output Area will also be re-displayed when you return.  
In addition to the instrument menu keys, CLR_INST, RST_INST and  
SEL_INST are helpful when operating instruments. These and other  
utility keys are accessed by pressing the UTILS key. See “Executing  
Commands” for information on the RCL_.... keys in this menu.  
CLR_INST clears the instruments terminal interface input and output  
buffers (remote buffers are not cleared) and returns to the top level of  
the instrument menu. Press CLR_INST whenever an instrument is busy,  
is not responding to terminal interface control, or to abort a command  
being entered from the terminal interface.  
RST_INST clears all terminal interface and remote input and output  
buffers and resets the instrument.  
SEL_INST returns you to the Select an Instrument menu. Note that  
SEL_INST is the key “under” the UTILS key. You can easily return to  
the Select an Instrument menu by pressing f8 twice.  
How to Access the Utility Keys  
3-4 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System The System Instrument menu allows you to:  
Instrument Menu  
Set or read the system GPIB address  
Reset (reboot) the mainframe  
Display the logical addresses of installed instruments  
Display information about installed instruments  
How to Set or Read the System GPIB Address  
Enter new GPIB address, press Return  
(range= 1 through 30)  
SCPI command used:  
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR < addr>  
Typical GPIB address  
SCPI command used:  
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR?  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Reset the System  
Press f1 to Reset  
Note: The RESET menu selection is equivalent to executing the DIAG:BOOT command which has the same  
effect as cycling the mainframe’s power. Pressing RST_INST from the System Instrument menu is the  
equivalent to sending the *RST command to the System Instrument.  
3-6 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Display Logical Addresses and Instrument Information  
Enter device’s logical address and press Return for individual  
instrument information, or just enter one space and Return, for  
information on all intruments.  
(In this case, 8 was entered)  
Instrument name  
Logical address of selected device  
GPIB secondary address  
Note:For a description of each field of the instrument information, see  
VXI:CONF:DLIS? in the SCPI Command Reference section.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Other The instrument menus allow you to access the most-used instrument functions  
or to monitor an instrument (monitor mode) while it is being controlled from  
Instrument Menus  
remote. Well use the Switchbox menu to show you how to use the instrument  
menus. Menus are available for many but not all instruments. See “Instrument  
Menus”, later in this chapter, for more information on a particular instruments  
menu. The Switchbox menu allows you to:  
Open and Close Channels  
Scan Channels  
Display Module Type and Description  
Monitor a Switchbox  
Reset a selected switch module  
Selecting the Switchbox To select the Switchbox, press the function key (f1 - f5) corresponds to the label  
SWITCH in the “Select an instrument” menu. (If the “Select an instrument” menu  
is not being displayed press UTILS then SEL_INST.)  
Note  
After you press the function key for SWITCH, the screen may show: “Select  
SWITCH at logical address:_” while the screen labels show two or more logical  
addresses. This means more than one Switchbox is installed in the mainframe.  
To select one of the Switchboxes, press the function key for the logical address  
key label.  
The charts on the following pages show how to use the Switchbox menu. Keep  
the following points in mind when using the menu:  
The card number identifies a module within the Switchbox. The module  
with the lowest logical address is always card number 01. The module  
with the next successive logical address is card number 02 and so on.  
The @ character is required preceding a channel list when executing a  
Switchbox command from the terminal interface or remote. When  
entering a channel list in response to a menu prompt however, do not  
precede it with the @ character. Doing so causes a syntax error.  
3-8 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Open/Close Channels  
Switchbox instrument at logical address 32  
(secondary address = 04)  
SCPI command used:  
Enter Channel List and press Return  
SCPI command used:  
OPEN < channel_list>  
(e.g., 102 for channel 2 on card # 1)  
CLOSE < channel_list>  
How to Scan Channels  
Press f2 to advance to the next channel in  
the Scan List (i.e. to trigger the instrument.)  
Enter Channel List and press Return  
(e.g., 100:115 to scan channels 00 to 15 on cardd # 1)  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Display Module Type , Description, or Reset Module  
Enter Card Number and press Return  
Enter Card Number and press Return  
SCPI command used:  
SYST:CPON < card_number>  
SCPI command used:  
SYST:CTYP? < card_number>  
Enter Card Number and press Return  
SCPI command used:  
SYST:CDES? < card_number>  
3-10 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Select Monitor Mode  
Enter Card Number or type  
AUTO and press Return  
SCPI commands used:  
DISP:MON:CARD < card_number>  
DISP:MON:STAT ON  
Monitor Mode Monitor mode displays the status of an instrument while it is being controlled  
from remote. Monitor mode is useful for debugging programs. You can place an  
instrument in monitor mode using terminal interface menus, or by executing the  
DISP:MON:STAT ON command from the terminal interface. Pressing most  
terminal interface keys will automatically exit monitor mode and return to the  
instrument menu. However, you can use the left and right arrow keys in monitor  
mode to view long displays.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
Enabling monitor mode slows instrument operations. If the timing or speed of  
instrument operations is critical (such as making multimeter readings at a  
precise time interval), you should not use monitor mode.  
Table 3-1 shows the status annunciators that may appear in the bottom line of  
the screen in monitor mode. Some instruments also have device-specific  
annunciators (see the plug-in module manual for more information).  
Table 3-1. Monitor Mode Display Annunciators  
Annunciator  
Description  
mon  
bsy  
err  
The instrument is in monitor mode  
The instrument is executing a command  
An error has occurred (see “Reading Error  
Messages” below)  
srq  
A service request has occurred  
Reading Error Messages Whenever the screen is showing the err annunciator, an error has occurred for  
the instrument being monitored. You can read the error message, although  
doing so cancels monitor mode. To read an error message, type the following  
SCPI command (followed by the Return key):  
SYST:ERR?  
The error message will be displayed in the bottom line of the Text Ouput Area.  
To see if another error was logged, repeat the above command by pressing  
UTILS, RCL_PREV, then Return.  
After you have read all the error messages, executing the SYST:ERR?  
command causes the screen to show: + 0 No error. After reading the error  
message(s), press f1 to return to monitor mode.  
3-12 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Executing  
Commands  
From the terminal interface, you can type and execute IEEE 488.2 Common  
Commands and SCPI Commands for the instrument presently selected by the  
Select an instrument menu. (However, you cannot execute a command when the  
screen is requesting that you input information.) This is particularly useful for  
accessing functions not available in an instruments menu. For example, the  
System Instrument contains a Pacer that can be programmed to output a square  
wave signal on the mainframes Pacer Out port. From the System Instrument  
menu, you can program the Pacer to output 10 square wave cycles with a period  
of 1 second each by typing the following commands and pressing Return after  
each command (see Chapter 3 for more information on the Pacer).  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 10  
SOUR:PULS:PER 1  
TRIG:SOUR IMM  
INIT:IMM  
As another example, after selecting the Switchbox, suppose you must set up and  
execute a scan list with automatic advance (automatic advance is not available  
from the menu). You can do this by typing the following command string and  
pressing Return (notice that by linking the commands together with a semicolon  
and colon you need press Return only once).  
TRIG:SOUR IMM;:SCAN (@100:105);:INIT  
Editing The screen editing keys (shown on the following page) allow you to edit  
user-entered data or commands. When editing, the screen is in insert mode.  
That is, typed characters will be inserted into the string at the present cursor  
position.  
Note  
The key labels shown are found on all HP terminals (except HP terminals  
supporting ANSI terminal protocol). See “Using Supported Terminals” for  
equivalent key functions on your terminal.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
General Key  
Descriptions  
This section explains the function of each of the terminal interfaces menu, menu  
control, and editing keys. If a key is not functional in a particular situation,  
pressing that key does nothing except to cause a beep.  
Menu and Menu  
Control Keys  
f1  
through  
f5  
Label menu choices for corresponding function keys.  
UTILS  
SEL_INST  
Returns to the Select an instrument menu.  
PRV_MENU  
Returns to the previous menu level within an instrument menu or escapes from  
an input prompt. When you reach the top of an instruments menu, the  
PRV_MENU label disappears.  
MORE  
The screen can show a maximum of five menu choices at a time. When there are  
more than five menu choices, function key f6 becomes labeled MORE. Press  
MORE to display the next group of choices. By repeatedly pressing MORE you  
can display all groups of choices. After you have displayed all groups of choices,  
pressing MORE again returns to the first group of choices.  
UTILS  
RCL_PREV  
Recalls the last command entered from the terminal interface. After recalling a  
command, it can be edited or re-executed. You can recall from a stack of  
previously executed commands by repeatedly pressing RCL_PREV. When you  
reach the bottom of the stack (the last line in the buffer), pressing RCL_PREV  
does nothing except to cause a beep.  
UTILS  
UTILS  
RCL_NEXT  
RCL_MENU  
Accesses commands in the opposite order to that of RCL_PREV. Pressing  
RCL_NEXT does nothing until you have pressed RCL_PREV at least twice.  
Recalls the last SCPI command generated by a menu operation. For example,  
reading the time using the menus (SYSTEM, TIME, READ) generates and  
executes the SCPI command SYST:TIME?. A recalled command can be  
executed by pressing the Return key. You can also edit a recalled command  
before you execute it.  
Performs the same function as PRV_MENU.  
Editing Keys  
(Right arrow key.) Moves the cursor one character space to the right while  
leaving characters intact.  
(Left arrow key.) Moves the cursor one character space to the left while leaving  
characters intact.  
Erases the character at the present cursor position (for user-entered data only).  
3-14 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erases the character to the left of the cursor (for user-entered data only).  
(Clear-to-end key.) Erases all characters from the present cursor position to the  
end of the input line (for user-entered data only).  
Selects the upper-case alphabetic characters or the character shown on the top  
half of a key.  
Sets all alphabetic keys to uppercase (capitals); does not affect the other keys.  
To return to lowercase, press Caps Lock again.  
Instrument Control  
Keys  
UTILS  
RST_INST  
Resets only the selected instrument (equivalent of executing *RST). RST_INST  
also clears the instruments terminal interface and remote input and output  
buffers. RST_INST is the only terminal interface key that can affect an  
instrument being operated from remote.  
UTILS  
CLR_INST  
Clears the terminal interface input and output buffers (remote buffers are not  
cleared) of the selected instrument and returns to the top level of the instrument  
menu. Press CLR_INST whenever an instrument is busy, is not responding to  
terminal interface control, or to abort a command being entered from the  
terminal interface.  
Other Keys  
End of line. Enters your responses to menu prompts. Executes commands  
entered from the terminal keyboard (may be labeled Enter on your terminal  
emulator).  
Selects alternate key definitions. These CTRL key sequences provide short-cuts  
to some of the menu sequences and also provide some functions not directly  
available from dedicated terminal keys. Some alternate key definitions are:  
CTRL R = Instrument Reset  
CTRL C = Clear Instrument  
CTRL D = Select an instrument menu.  
For a complete list of all CTRL Sequences, see Table 3-3 in this chapter. Users  
of the optional IBASIC interpreter should refer to their IBASIC manual set for  
additional editing functions.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Using Supported  
Terminals  
The Display Terminal Interface supports several popular terminal brands and  
models. This chapter will show you how to access all of the terminal interface  
functions described previously using your supported terminal.  
The Supported The following list names the supported terminals and shows where to go for  
more information. If your terminal isnt named in this list, see “Using Other  
Terminals” in the next section.  
Terminals  
HP 700/92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu tutorial  
HP 700/94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu tutorial  
HP 700/22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 3-17  
HP 700/43 and WYSE WY-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 3-19  
The keyboard guides provided for the listed terminals may be removed or  
copied, and placed near your keyboard while you go through the menu tutorial  
sections.  
3-16 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the HP 700/22 The HP 700/22 terminal emulates the DEC® VT100® or VT220® terminals.  
Some functions of the Display Terminal Interface have been mapped into keys  
with other labels. A keyboard map is provided for each of the emulation models.  
Use these keyboard maps to help locate the terminal interface functions.  
VT100® Key Map The symbols shown in the upper left corner of key each are now mapped with  
the function labeled in the center of each key.  
Selecting VT100® Mode To use the HP 700/22 in VT100® mode, press the Set-Up key and set the  
following configuration:  
Fields  
Terminal Mode  
Value  
EM100, 7 bit Ctrls  
Columns  
80  
EM100 ID  
EM100  
YES  
Inhibit Auto Wrap  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VT220® Key Map The function keys that are normally labeled f6 through f14 are now labeled:  
Note  
Because the HP 700/22 keyboard has nine function keys in the center of the  
keyboard, f4 is mapped twice  
The symbols shown in the upper left corner of key each are now mapped with  
the function labeled in the center of each key.  
Selecting VT220® Mode To use the HP 700/22 in VT220® mode, press the Set-Up key and set the  
following configuration:  
Fields  
Terminal Mode  
Value  
EM200, 7 bit Ctrls  
Columns  
80  
EM100 ID  
EM220  
YES  
Inhibit Auto Wrap  
3-18 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the WYSE  
WY-30  
With the WYSE WY-30 terminal, some functions of the Display Terminal  
Interface have been assigned to keys with other labels. Use this keyboard map to  
help locate these functions.  
The symbols shown in the upper left corner of key each are now mapped with  
the function labeled in the center of each key.  
Where two function key labels are shown, the one following the "/"character is  
accessed by pressing and holding the CTRL key while pressing the desired  
function key (e.g. to access the f6 function, press CTRL-f2/f6).  
1
Using Other  
Terminals  
This section discusses using terminals which are not on the Supported Terminals  
list. Primarily this section is to help you use terminals which do not provide  
programmable soft keys (function keys). Without this capability, a terminal can  
not access the Display Terminal Interfaces menus. Instead, the terminal  
interface provides a set of Terminal Interface Commands which allow you to  
select instruments by name or logical address. Once selected, you can type  
Common Commands or SCPI commands to the instrument. In addition,  
keyboard accessible control codes provide display control for terminals which  
may not have keys dedicated to those functions.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What “Not Supported” Strictly speaking, a terminal is not supported if it has not been rigorously tested  
with the Display Terminal Interface. There are several HP terminals which may  
Means  
be compatible with the terminal interface. Terminals such as the  
DEC® VT100®, DEC® VT220®, and WYSE® WY-50 , or emulations of these  
may also work properly with the terminal interface. If you have one of these  
terminals, try it. Here is a list of terminals you should try.  
HP 2392A  
HP 2394A  
DEC® VT100®  
DEC® VT220®  
WYSE® WY-50  
HP AdvanceLink terminal emulation software (configure as HP 2392A)  
Testing Terminals for Here is how you test an unsupported terminal for compatibility with the Display  
Terminal Interface:  
Compatibility  
1. Connect your terminal and configure its communication parameters to  
match the mainframes serial interface (see Appendix C)  
2. With your terminal turned on and set to “remote mode”, turn on the  
mainframe. After the mainframe power-on self-test, the display interface  
sends sequences of characters to your terminal which should cause it to  
return its identification. If the terminal ID matches one in a list kept by  
the terminal interface, it will send character sequences to program the  
function keys and their labels.  
3. If you now see the “Select an instrument” prompt and the “Select an  
instrument” menu labels, your terminal is ready to try. Go to the  
beginning of this chapter and try the menus.  
4. If you see only the “Select an instrument” prompt without the “Select an  
instrument” menu labels, your terminal did not return a recognized ID.  
To set the terminal type manually, type the Terminal Interface Command:  
ST HP (followed by Return for HP terminals)  
or  
ST VT100 (followed by Return for VT100® emulators)  
or  
ST VT220 (followed by Return for VT220® emulators)  
or  
ST WYSE30 (followed by Return for WY-30® emulators)  
or  
ST WYSE50 (followed by Return for WY-50 emulators)  
NOTE  
You can type "ST"without arguments at the "Select an Instrument"menu. The  
display terminal will attempt to identify the terminal that is connected. This is  
particularly useful if you are hooking a terminal to a system which already has  
power, since you do not need to cycle power and wait for the system to reboot.  
3-20 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you now see the “Select an instrument” menu labels:  
Go to the beginning of this chapter and try the menus.  
or  
Turn the mainframe off and then on again.  
Using a Terminal You can still control instruments installed in your mainframe without using the  
terminal interface menus. In this case you will send Common Commands and  
SCPI commands to your instruments by typing them on your terminal keyboard,  
or through a computer interface.  
Without Menus  
Selecting Instruments To send commands to, and receive responses from an instrument, you must first  
select that instrument. Two commands are provided to select instruments. They  
are; SI (Select Instrument), and SA (Select Address). These commands only  
work from the “Select an instrument” prompt. The commands can be typed in  
upper case or lower case.  
SI  
SI selects an instrument by its name, exactly as it would appear in the “Select an  
instrument” menu (see Table 3-2). If your mainframe has more than one  
instrument with the same name, follow the name with a comma (,) and the  
desired instruments logical address. Here are some examples of SI commands:  
si voltmtr (selects a voltmeter instrument)  
si switch (selects a switchbox instrument)  
SI SWITCH (same as above)  
si switch,16 (selects switchbox at logical address 16)  
Table 3-2. Instrument Names for the SI Command  
Menu Name  
SYSTEM  
Instrument  
The System Instrument (built-in to the mainframe)  
VOLTMTR  
Agilent E1326A Standalone, or Agilent E1326A  
Scanning Voltmeter Modules  
SWITCH  
DIG_I/O  
Switchbox composed of one or more Agilent  
Multiplexer Modules  
Agilent E1330A Quad 8-Bit Digital Input/Output  
Module  
IBASIC  
Optional IBASIC interpreter  
COUNTER  
Agilent E1332A 4-Channel Counter/Totalizer, or  
Agilent E1333A Universal Counter Modules  
D/A  
Agilent E1328A Digital to Analog Converter  
Module  
SA SA selects an instrument by its logical address. For multiple module  
instruments, use the logical address of the first module in the instrument. For  
example; SA 8 selects the instrument at logical address 8. When you have  
selected an instrument, the terminal interface will respond with an instrument  
prompt which is the instruments menu name followed by its logical address  
(e.g. VOLTMTR_8:).  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To get a list of the logical addresses used in your mainframe, send the SCPI  
command VXI:CONF:DLAD? to the System Instrument. Then to determine  
what instrument is at each logical address, send the command  
VXI:CONF:DLIS? n for each logical address in the list (where n is a logical  
address).  
Returning to the “Select an To return to the “Select an instrument” prompt, press and hold the CTRL key  
Instrument” Prompt  
then press D.  
Control Sequences for The terminal interface provides the keyboard control sequences listed in Table  
Terminal Interface Functions  
3-3. These can be thought of as keyboard short-cuts for compatible terminals  
(those which provide menu capability). Only those functions in the table which  
are shaded, operate for “UNKNOWN” terminal types (those which do not  
support menus). An “UNKNOWN” terminal type has very limited editing  
capability. It will not support the EDIT mode for the optional IBASIC  
interpreter. In the following table, † = IBASIC only, ‡ = Front Panel only.  
Table 3-3. Control Sequence Functions  
Del char  
Delete character at the cursor position  
Clears line from cursor position to end of line  
Clears line regardless of cursor position  
Inserts a blank line at the cursor position  
CTRL-X  
CTRL-L  
CTRL-U  
CTRL-O  
Clr end  
Clear line  
Insert line †  
Delete line † ‡ Deletes the line at the current cursor position CTRL-DEL  
End of line  
Start of line  
Return  
Move cursor to the end of current line  
Move cursor to the beginning of current line  
Terminates user entry  
CTRL-Z  
CTRL-A  
CTRL-M  
CTRL-W  
RCL_MENU Recalls the last command executed via the  
menu keys  
RCL_PREV  
Recalls the last several commands executed  
via user input  
CTRL-F  
CTRL-B  
RCL_NEXT  
After RCL_PREV, RCL_NEXT may be  
used to move forward through the recalled  
commands  
SEL_INST  
CLR_INST  
RST_INST  
Return to “Select an instrument” menu  
Clear instruments input and output buffers  
Like CLR_INST plus clears  
CTRL-D  
CTRL-C  
CTRL-R  
3-22 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
In Case of Difficulty  
Problem:  
Problem Cause/Solution:  
Error -113 undefined header error occurs after  
entering data in response to a menu prompt.  
For some commands used by the menus, the data  
entered is appended to a command header. For  
example, if you enter "1"as the port number for a digital  
I/O module, the command used is  
DIG:HAND1:MODE NONE where HAND1 indicates  
the port number. If your entry was invalid or incorrect,  
error -113 occurs.  
Following the power-on sequence or system reset the  
display shows:  
An unnassigned device (incorrect logical address) was  
detected, or the contents of non-volatile memory may  
have been lost, If you cycle power or perform system  
reset, the display will show the logical address of the  
unassigned device. You can also check the logical  
addresses using the CONFIG? -- LADDS branch of the  
System Instrument menu. Refer to Chapter 1 of this  
manual for a discussion of logical addresses and  
unassigned devices.  
Configuration errors. Select SYSTEM  
Press any key to continue_  
The display shows: "instrument in local lockout".  
The terminal interface has been locked-out (GPIB local  
Menus seem to work but nothing happens when I reach lockout). You can re-enable menu operation by  
the bottom level or try to execute a command.  
cancelling local lockout (from remote) or by cycling  
mainframe power.  
Display cannot be removed from monitor mode.  
Monitor mode was entered from remote  
(DISP:MON:STAT ON command) and the terminal  
interface has also been locked out (GPIB local  
lockout). Either cancel the local lockout or execute  
DISP:MON:STAT OFF (from remote).  
Display shows:  
A hardware or software problem has occured in the  
instrument preventing it from responding to terminal  
interface control.  
Can not connect to instrument  
Press any key to continue._  
After selecting an instrument the display shows:  
The instrument is busy performing an operation. Press  
Clear Instr to abort the instrument operations and  
allow the terminal interface to access the instrument.  
"busy".  
Display shows:  
The instrument has already been selected from the  
Front Panel. An instrument can only be “attached” to  
one display at a time. At the Front Panel, press Select  
Instr. The instrument can now be selected from the  
terminal interface.  
Instrument in use by another display.  
Press any key to continue_  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
3-24 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Instrument Menus  
This section contains charts showing the structure and content for all terminal  
interface instrument menus. Also shown in the charts are the SCPI or Common  
Commands used and descriptions of menu-controlled instrument operations.  
This section contains the following charts:  
System Instrument Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26  
Switchbox Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28  
Scanning Voltmeter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30  
Agilent E1326A 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32  
Agilent E1328A 4-Channel D/A Converter Menu. . . . . . . . . . 3-33  
Agilent E1330A Quad 8-Bit Digital I/O Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34  
Agilent E1332A 4-Channel Counter/Totalizer Menu . . . . . . . 3-36  
Agilent E1333A 3-Channel Universal Counter Menu. . . . . . . 3-38  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-26 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-28 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-30 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-32 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-34 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-36 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-38 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Display Terminal Interface 3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
3-40 Using the Display Terminal Interface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Using the Mainframe  
Using this Chapter  
This chapter shows how to use the mainframes Pacer function, how to change  
the primary GPIB address, and how to synchronize internal and external  
instruments using the mainframes Event In and Trigger Out ports. This chapter  
also discusses how mainframe memory is used by installed instruments. Where  
possible, examples show only the command string sent to the instrument (no  
information about a computer language or interface is shown). Examples that  
require showing a computer language are written for HP 9000 Series 200/300  
Computers using BASIC language and the GPIB interface. This chapter  
contains the following sections:  
Using the Pacer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Changing the Primary GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Synchronizing Internal and External Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Mainframe Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
1
Using the Pacer  
The Pacer generates a square wave signal on the mainframes rear panel Pacer  
Out connecter. The signal levels are standard TTL levels (0V to 5V). The Pacer  
signal can be used to trigger or pace external equipment such as scanners or  
voltmeters. Figure 4-1 shows a single cycle of the Pacer output with a specified  
period of 1 second.  
The following SCPI commands control the Pacer:  
Figure 4-1. Pacer Out Square Wave  
Using the Mainframe 4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUR:PULS:COUN sets the number of Pacer cycles. Specify from 1 to  
8388607 cycles or specify INF for a continuous output.  
SOUR:PULS:PER sets the period of each Pacer cycle. You can specify  
periods from 500ns to 8.3 seconds.  
TRIG:SOUR sets the trigger source. The Pacer signal is output whenever  
the trigger event occurs (specified by the TRIG:SOUR command) and  
the INIT:IMM command has been executed.  
Example: Pacing an External Scanner This example paces an external scanner  
connected to the mainframes Pacer Out port. Each negative-going transition of  
the square wave advances to the next channel in the scanners channel list. In  
this example, the Pacer outputs 10 periods of 1 second each.  
ABORT  
Set Pacer trigger system to Idle  
State  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 10  
SOUR:PULS:PER 1  
TRIG:SOUR IMM  
Configure Pacer for 10 cycles  
Square wave period = 1 second  
Trigger Pacer (when INIT is  
executed)  
INIT:IMM  
Place Pacer in Wait for Trigger  
State  
Example: Continuous Pacer Out Signal This example generates a continuous  
signal with a period of 250ms. The signal will begin when the trigger event  
(EXT) occurs (a negative-going transition on the mainframes Event In  
connector).  
ABORT  
Set Pacer trigger system to Idle  
State  
SOUR:PULS:COUN INF  
SOUR:PULS:PER 250E-3  
Configure Pacer for continuous  
output  
Square wave period = 250  
milliseconds  
TRIG:SOUR EXT  
INIT:IMM  
Trigger Pacer on external signal  
Place Pacer in Wait for Trigger  
State  
Pacer Trigger States Figure 4-2 shows that the Pacers trigger system has an Idle State, a Wait for  
Trigger State, and a Pacer Action State. When you apply power, reset the  
system, or execute the ABORT command, the trigger system goes to the Idle  
State. You can configure the Pacer (SOURce subsystem) and specify the trigger  
source (TRIG:SOUR command) while in the Idle State. Executing the  
INIT:IMM command places the Pacer in the Wait for Trigger State. Now when  
the trigger event occurs, the Pacer will move to the Pacer Action State and begin  
outputting the specified number of square wave cycles. Once the Pacer has  
begun outputting, the trigger system returns to the Idle State.  
4-2 Using the Mainframe  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 4-2. Pacer Trigger States  
1
Changing the  
Primary GPIB  
Address  
You can set the mainframes primary GPIB address to any integer value  
between 0 and 30. The address is set to 9 at the factory. (See Chapter 2 for  
instructions on setting/reading the GPIB address from the front panel.) The  
following command sets the mainframes primary GPIB address to 12.  
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 12  
1
Synchronizing  
Internal and  
External  
The mainframes Trig Out and Event In ports allow you to synchronize external  
equipment to instruments operating within the mainframe. The Trig Out port  
allows an instrument in the mainframe to output a negative-going pulse to  
indicate the occurrence of some event such as a multiplexer channel closure.  
The signal levels are standard TTL (0V to 5V). You direct the pulse from the  
appropriate instrument to the Trig Out port by sending the OUTP:STAT ON  
command to that instrument.  
Instruments  
The Event In port allows an instrument in the mainframe to be armed or  
triggered from an external negative-going signal. The signal levels are standard  
TTL (0V to 5V). Send the ARM:SOUR:EXT command or the  
TRIG:SOUR:EXT command to an instrument to direct the signal on the Event  
In port to that instrument.  
The following examples use an external Agilent 3457A Multimeter and an  
internal Agilent E1345A 16-Channel Multiplexer to demonstrate the use of the  
Trig Out and Event In ports.  
Using the Mainframe 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example: Synchronizing an Internal Instrument to an External Instrument  
This example uses the mainframes Trig Out and Event In ports to synchronize  
an external multimeter to a multiplexer installed in the mainframe. Connections  
are shown in Figure 4-3. The multimeters Voltmeter Complete port outputs a  
pulse whenever the multimeter has finished a reading. The multimeters  
External Trigger port allows the multimeter to be triggered by a negative going  
TTL pulse. Since the synchronization is independent of the GPIB bus and the  
computer, readings must be stored in the multimeters reading memory. The  
sequence of operation is:  
1. INIT (line 50) closes channel number 100.  
2. The channel closure causes a pulse on Trig Out which triggers the  
multimeter to take a reading.  
3. When the reading is complete it is stored in multimeter memory and the  
multimeter outputs a pulse on its Voltmeter Complete port. This signals  
the multiplexer to advance to the next channel in the scan list.  
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until all channels have been scanned and  
readings taken.  
10 OUTPUT 722;"TRIG EXT;DCV;MEM FIFO"  
Set multimeter to external trigger, DC volts, enable reading  
memory  
20 OUTPUT 70914;"OUTP ON"  
Enable TrigOut port  
30 OUTPUT 70914;"TRIG:SOUR EXT"  
Set multiplexer to advance scan  
on external signal  
40 OUTPUT 70914;"SCAN (@100:115)" Specify scan list (channels 100  
to 115)  
50 OUTPUT 70914;"INIT"  
60 END  
Close first channel (starts  
scanning cycle)  
Example: Synchronizing Internal/External Instruments and the Computer This  
example uses the mainframes Trig Out port to synchronize an external  
Figure 4-3. Synchronizing Internal/External Instruments  
4-4 Using the Mainframe  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
multimeter to an internal multiplexer. Connections are shown in Figure 4-4. This  
method synchronizes the computer to the instruments and relies on the  
computer to enter each reading and advance to the next channel in the scan list.  
The sequence of operation is:  
1. INIT (line 50) closes channel number 100.  
2. The channel closure causes a pulse on Trig Out which triggers the  
multimeter to take a reading.  
3. When the reading is complete it is sent to the computer (lines 60 to 80).  
4. The computer sends Group Execute Trigger to the multiplexer (line 90);  
this advances to the next channel in the scan list.  
5. Steps 2 through 4 are repeated until all channels have been scanned and  
readings taken.  
10 OUTPUT 722;"TRIG EXT;DCV"  
Set multimeter to external trigger, DC voltage measurements  
20 OUTPUT 70914;"OUTP ON"  
Enable TrigOut port  
30 OUTPUT 70914;"TRIG:SOUR BUS"  
Set multiplexer to advance scan on Group Execute Trigger or  
*TRG  
40 OUTPUT 70914;"SCAN (@100:115)" Specify scan list (channels 100  
to 115)  
50 OUTPUT 70914;"INIT"  
60 FOR I= 1 TO 16  
70 ENTER 722;A  
Close first channel (starts  
scanning cycle)  
Loop through followinglines  
16 times  
Enter reading (computer waits  
until reading taken & received)  
80 PRINT A  
Print reading  
90 TRIGGER 70914  
Trigger multiplexer; advances  
to next channel  
100 NEXT I  
110 END  
Using the Mainframe 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 4-4. Synchronizing Internal/External Instruments and Computer  
1
Mainframe Data  
Memory  
When power is applied or the system rebooted (DIAG:BOOT command),  
mainframe memory is automatically configured to provide a predefined amount  
of memory for any installed instruments that require memory space. For  
example, each multimeter instrument within the mainframe is allocated enough  
memory to store 100 readings.  
Mainframe memory is also automatically re-allocated upon demand while  
programming. For example, if greater than 100 readings are requested for a  
multimeter, the mainframe computes the amount of memory required for these  
extra readings. If enough memory space is available, an additional amount is  
allocated to the multimeter and the readings are stored. If enough memory is  
not available, an error message occurs and the command is aborted. The  
memory allocated to an instrument above the initial power-on amount remains  
dedicated to that instrument until that instrument is reset (*RST command) or  
until power is cycled. Once de-allocated, the memory is available to other  
instruments.  
Using Mainframe Data Commands that generate data and do not have a question mark (?) in their  
syntax store the data in mainframe memory. Faster instrument reading rates are  
Memory  
possible when using reading memory versus sending data directly to an external  
computer. Storing readings in memory can also help to ensure that the period  
between paced readings is maintained at a constant value. When instrument  
data is stored in memory, it overwrites any data previously stored by that  
instrument. You can retrieve data stored in mainframe memory using the  
FETCh? command.  
4-6 Using the Mainframe  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example: Storing and Retrieving Data From Mainframe Memory. This  
example shows how to use mainframe memory to store 15 readings made using  
an Agilent E1326A Multimeter. After the readings are stored, they are retrieved  
by the computer and displayed.  
10 REAL OHM_RGS(1:15)  
Create computer array for 15  
readings  
20 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:FRES (@105:109)"  
Configure multimeter for 4-wire  
resistance, scan channels 105 -  
109  
30 OUTPUT 70903;"RES:OCOM ON"  
40 OUTPUT 70903;"TRIG:COUN 3"  
50 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"  
Enable offset compensation  
Cycle through scan list 3 times  
Trigger multimeter, store the  
readings in mainframe memory  
60 OUTPUT 70903;"FETCH?"  
Get readings from mainframe  
memory  
70 ENTER 70903;OHM_RGS(*)  
80 PRINT OHM_RGS (*)  
90 END  
Enter readings into computer  
Display readings on computer  
1
Non-Volatile User  
Memory  
The System Instrument provides a way to allocate a segment of its non-volatile  
memory for storage and retrieval of user data. The structure and content of the  
data you store in this memory segment is up to you. The commands provided for  
data access merely store or retrieve a specified number of bytes. Commands for  
allocating and accessing the memory segment are implemented by the System  
Instrument (logical address, and GPIB secondary address 0).  
Allocating a User The SCPI command DIAGnostic:NRAM:CREate < size> is used to allocate a  
segment of User non-volatile RAM. The ammount of memory allocated is  
Memory Segment  
controlled by the size parameter. The DIAG:NRAM:CRE command informs  
the system of your request for a User RAM segment. The segment in not  
allocated until the system is reset (DIAG:BOOT command, or RESET from the  
front panel). Once the NRAM segment is allocated, you can consider it part of  
your System Instruments configuration. It will remain through power  
interruptions and system resets. Only the DIAG:BOOT:COLD , or  
DIAG:NRAM:CRE 0 commands can de-allocate the NRAM segment.  
Note:  
IBASIC Users  
Allocating an NRAM segment will de-allocate a previously allocated RDISk  
segment. To include both types; allocate them both before a reset, or allocate  
the NRAM segment, reset the system, then allocate the RDISk segment and  
again reset the system.  
Locating the NRAM Since the system decides where in memory to locate the NRAM segment, you  
must execute the DIAG:NRAM:ADDRess? query to determine its starting  
segment  
Using the Mainframe 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
address. You will then know the starting address , and (from the  
NRAM:CRE < size> command) the length of the NRAM segment.  
Example: Allocating an NRAM segment and locating it. This example shows  
how to allocate a small 128 byte NRAM segment. In addition, it shows how to  
determine the starting address of that segment.  
define variables  
10 REAL Addr,Size  
128 byte NRAM segment  
20 OUTPUT 70900;"DIAG:NRAM:CRE 128"  
reset the system  
30 OUTPUT 70900;"DIAG:BOOT"  
allow time for reset to begin  
40 WAIT 5  
wait for self-test to complete  
50 ON TIMEOUT 7,.1 GOTO Complete  
60 Complete:B= SPOLL(70900)  
query startingaddr  
70 OUTPUT 70900;"DIAG:NRAM:ADDR?"  
enter starting addr  
80 ENTER 70900;Addr  
print it  
90 PRINT USING "31X,""Addr= "",8D";Addr  
4-8 Using the Mainframe  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using :DOWNload and The command DIAG:DOWNload < address> ,< data_block> is used to store  
data into the NRAM segment. The command  
DIAG:UPLoad? < address> ,< byte_count> is used to retrieve data from the  
NRAM segment. The address parameter in DOWNload and UPLoad? can  
specify any address within the capability of the System Instruments control  
processor. The system does not restrict you from storing or retrieving data which  
is outside of the NRAM segment.  
:UPload? to Access  
Data  
Caution  
This capability to store (DOWNload) data to any location in mainframe memory  
means that you could inadvertently change the contents of memory being used  
by the mainframe control processor. This will occur if:  
you specify a starting address for DOWNload which is outside the  
NRAM segment  
you specify a starting address for DOWNload which is inside the NRAM  
segment, but the data block you send extends past the end of the NRAM  
segment.  
If either of these occur, operation of the mainframe will be disrupted. To restore  
operation:  
1. turn the mainframe off and then back on.  
2. while the mainframe is “Testing ROM”, press the Reset Instr button on  
the front panel or, for terminal users, press the CTRL and R keys.  
This operation is the same as executing DIAG:BOOT:COLD  
Data Formats for Data stored into NRAM using :DOWNload can be sent in either Definite, or  
Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data formats (see Parameter Types  
:DOWNload  
in the beginning of Chapter 5). The Definite Length block format is  
recommended since the format includes a data length count which positively  
terminates the :DOWNload command when that count is reached. If the  
Indefinite Length formats termination sequence (< newline> with END) is not  
received correctly, commands sent after the :DOWNload command will be  
interpreted as more data and sent to memory, possibly overwriting system  
memory and disrupting mainframe operation.  
The following example program will use the small NRAM segment created in  
the previous example. It will show how to store and retrieve:  
64 ASCII characters  
thirty-two, 8 bit data bytes  
sixteen, 16 bit data words  
Using the Mainframe 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example: Storing and Retrieving data using DOWNload and UPLoad.  
define variables for DOWNload and UPLoad  
90 DIM Chars$[64],Chars_back$[80]  
100 INTEGER Words(1:16),Bytes(1:32),Words_back(1:16),  
Bytes_back(1:32)  
create string of characters  
110 Chars$= "1234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
123456789012345678901234"  
create array of 16 bit data words  
120 FOR I= 1 TO 16  
130 Words(I)= 32700+ I  
140 NEXT I  
create array of 8 bit data bytes  
150 FOR I= 1 TO 32  
160 Bytes(I)= 63+ I  
170 NEXT I  
DOWNload 16 words to NRAM segment  
180 OUTPUT 70900 USING """DIAG:DOWN "",8D,"",# 232"",16(W)";  
Addr+ 96,Words(*)  
DOWNload 32 bytes to NRAM segment  
190 OUTPUT 70900 USING """DIAG:DOWN "",8D,"",# 232"",32(B)";  
Addr+ 64,Bytes(*)  
Download 64 characters to NRAM segment  
200 OUTPUT 70900 USING """DIAG:DOWN "",8D,"",# 264"",64A";  
Addr,Chars$  
UPLoad 64 characters from NRAM segment  
210 OUTPUT 70900 USING """DIAG:UPL? "",8D,"",64""";Addr  
220 ENTER 70900 USING "4X,64A";Chars_back$  
230 PRINT TAB(5);Chars_back$  
UPLoad 32 data bytes from NRAM segment  
240 OUTPUT 70900 USING """DIAG:UPL? "",8D,"",32""";Addr+ 64  
250 ENTER 70900 USING "4X,32(B)";Bytes_back(*)  
260 PRINT Bytes_back(*)  
UPLoad 16 data words from NRAM segment  
270 OUTPUT 70900 USING """DIAG:UPL? "",8D,"",32""";Addr+ 96  
280 ENTER 70900 USING "4X,16(W)";Words_back(*)  
290 PRINT Words_back(*)  
300 END  
4-10 Using the Mainframe  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Downloading Device Drivers  
About this Chapter  
This chapter describes the procedure for using downloadable device drivers  
with the Agilent E1405 Command Module. This functionality was added so that  
SCPI capability for new register based devices could be added to the Command  
Module without having to update an internal set of ROMs. This chapter  
contains the following sections:  
About this Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
What You Will Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Download Program Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Downloading Drivers in MS-DOS systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Downloading Drivers in IBASIC Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Downloading Drivers from Other BASIC Systems . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Downloading Multiple Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Checking Driver Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Manually Downloading Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
1
What You Will Need  
The downloadable device drivers and the software necessary to download the  
drivers into Agilent mainframes are provided on 3.5" floppy disks which ship  
with the device driver manual. Disks are provided in both LIF and DOS format  
for your convenience. Drivers and appropriate downloading software are  
provided for use in MS-DOS systems downloading over an RS-232 link and for  
use in systems using BASIC or IBASIC (Instrument BASIC) and downloading  
over an GPIB (IEEE 488.2) link. The procedures for both types of downloaders  
are detailed later in this chapter.  
Figure 5-1 shows the files and documents that will be needed for each type of  
download supported.  
For RS-232 downloads you will need appropriate cables to connect your  
computer to the Command Module. If your computer has a 25 pin serial output  
connector, you can use an Agilent 24542G cable to make the connection. If your  
computer has a 9 pin serial output connector, you can use an Agilent 24542M  
and an Agilent 24542H cable (connected end to end) to make the connection.  
Downloading Device Drivers 5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GPIB bus  
GPIB bus  
GPIB bus  
GPIB  
Figure 5-1. Driver and Documentation Usage  
5-2 Downloading Device Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Memory  
Configuration  
Before attempting to download any device drivers you should understand how  
memory is affected when you specify a size for one or more types of RAM.  
There are three types of RAM that you can allocate in the mainframe:  
RAM disk (RDISK)  
Non-volatile RAM (NRAM)  
Driver RAM (DRAM)  
Figure 5-2 shows the positioning of these areas in memory. User Non-volatile  
RAM and RAM Disk both occupy higher memory addresses than the Driver  
RAM. Because the actual size of these three areas is variable, they do not have a  
fixed starting position. At creation time, the lowest unused memory address  
becomes the starting address for the requested type of RAM. Memory areas set  
at higher addresses can be created without affecting any previously created  
lower memory areas, but creating a new memory area causes any areas above it  
to be removed.  
NOTE  
If you wish to use RDISK or NRAM, you can modify the configuration file so  
that the download program sets up the required memory segments.  
FFFFFFh  
System Non-volatile  
Instrument Memory  
Operating System memory  
RAM Disk  
Non-volatile User RAM  
Driver RAM  
Low Memory  
The Low Address depends on the amount of memory installed. It is equal to the highest address  
plus 1 (1000000h) minus the size of memory installed. The boot time messages will tell you how  
much RAM you have installed in your system. In a system with 512Kbytes of memory the Low  
Address is low address = 1000000h - 80000h = F80000h, or 16,252,928 decimal.  
Figure 5-2. Positioning of Allocatable RAM  
Example If you create a RAM Disk area without creatingany User Non-volatile RAM or  
Driver RAM, the starting address for the RAM Disk will be at the lowest address  
(F80000h for a command module with 512Kbytes of memory). If you now create a  
Driver RAM area, the RAM Disk area will be removed since the new area has to be  
at a lower address then the RAM Disk area.  
Downloading Device Drivers 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Download Program  
Configuration  
If you will not be using the default configurations for downloading, you will need  
to edit the configuration file to match your system configuration. If the default  
values shown below are correct for your setup, you can proceed to the  
appropriate downloading instructions.  
The configuration defaults for MS-DOS systems are:  
Download program searches for drivers in current directory.  
Execution Log is OFF (log to screen only).  
All drivers in current directory will be downloaded.  
COM1 is used for output.  
Baud rate is 9600.  
1 stop bit is used  
NRAM size is zero.  
RDISK size is zero.  
The configuration defaults for GPIB systems are:  
Download program searches for drivers in current directory.  
Execution Log is OFF (log to screen only).  
All drivers in current directory will be downloaded.  
80900 is used for the interface address when running from IBASIC. 70900  
is used as the interface address when running in any BASIC environment  
other than IBASIC.  
NRAM size is zero.  
RDISK size is zero.  
Editing the The configuration file (VXIDLD.CFG or VXIDLD_CFG) on your driver  
distribution disk is shipped with all entries commented out. In this state, the  
Configuration File  
download programs will use the default values shown above. To activate or  
change an entry, you must edit the file manually. The file is set up so that it can  
be edited either by a standard text editor or word processor, or with a Basic  
language editor. Comments and instructions are included in the file.  
The beginning of the useful information on each line is the part following  
"linenumber REM" (the "linenumber REM" is ignored).  
All lines beginning with "# "are comments.  
Lines that start with "# # "are intended to remain comments.  
Lines that start with "# "are example lines that you may wish to activate  
and/or modify. These are the actual configuration statements.  
Setting labels are not case sensitive, and should be separated from the  
associated value by an equal sign ("= ").  
Unrecognized settings are ignored.  
If you activate more than one line for a setting that can take only one  
value, the first value found for the setting will be used.  
DIRECTORY= specifies the directory where you store your drivers and where  
the driver programs will log information about their progress. The default is the  
current directory. The directory specified must be writeable if you are doing  
downloads using IBASIC or logging progress.  
EXECUTION LOG = specifies the place to log information about the  
programs progress. The default location for this function is the screen. If you  
5-4 Downloading Device Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
specify a file name here, the driver downloader will log to the screen and to the  
specified file.  
DRIVER FILE = specifies the driver file or files to download. The default is to  
download all device driver files found in the directory specified by  
DIRECTORY = . If the driver downloader finds one line in this format, it will  
assume that you are specifying entries and will only download the listed entries.  
This configuration item can have multiple lines.  
ADDRESS = specifies the I/O interface that you will be using. The default  
interface address when running in IBASIC over GPIB is 80900. The default  
address when running over GPIB in any other BASIC environment is 70900. The  
default address when running in DOS is 1 (for COM1:).  
The communication interface you will be using when running from any of the  
BASIC environments is the "GPIB"interface (also known as IEEE 488.1).  
Selection of a specific GPIB interface consists of an address in the form "sspp00"  
where:  
ss is the select code of the GPIB interface card.  
pp is the primary GPIB address used for the VXI mainframe.  
00 is the secondary GPIB address used for the SYSTEM instrument.  
The communication interface you will be using when running from DOS is the  
"RS-232" interface. When Using the RS-232 interface the serial cable must be  
connected to either the built-in RS-232 connection of the VXI mainframe or an  
RS-232 module (Agilent E1324A) that is set to interrupt at the default interrupt  
level (level 1). Selection of the address for the RS-232 interface consists of an  
address that is 1 for COM1 or 2 for COM2:.  
BAUD= specifies the baud rate of the transmission if you are using RS-232. The  
default is 9600 (which is also the default for the VXI mainframe after a  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD command). Allowed values are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,  
7200, or 9600 (19,200 is not supported by DOS).  
STOP BITS= specifies the number of stop bits per byte if you are using RS-232.  
The default is 1 (which is also the default for the VXI mainframe after a  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD command). Allowed values are 1 or 2.  
NRAM= specifies the size in bytes of the non-volatile user RAM area you wish  
to set up. The default value is zero bytes. You may change this value later  
independent of the downloaded drivers, but changing it will always affect any  
RAM disk (RDISK) you have specified.  
RDISK = specifies the size in bytes of the RAM disk segment you wish to set  
up. The default value is zero bytes. You can change this value later without  
affecting either the downloaded device drivers or the user non-volatile RAM  
(NRAM).  
Downloading Device Drivers 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Downloading  
Drivers in MS-DOS  
Systems  
The device driver download program VXIDLD.EXE provided on the disk with  
the driver files for use with an RS-232 interface must be run from MS-DOS. It  
will set up the the required device driver memory and any other memory  
partitions defined in the configuration file, reboot the system, and download the  
device driver. If there are device drivers present, or you already have memory  
allocated for NRAM (User Non-volatile RAM) or RDISK (RAM Disk), a  
warning will be issued and the downloading process aborted. You must first  
clear any existing drivers from the system, and then download all of the required  
drivers together. You may redefine any NRAM or RDISK areas after  
downloading the device drivers.  
1. Make sure that your computer can talk to the E1405 Command Module.  
If you have changed the communications protocol for the Command  
Module or mainframe, you must change them back to 9600 BAUD, 8  
data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity before this download will work  
correctly.  
These are the defaults after cold boot. If necessary, you can change the  
baud rate and number of stop bits in the configuration file, but since the  
special formatting required for downloading over RS-232 requires all 8  
data bits in each byte, you must make sure that the data bits are set to 8  
and parity checking is OFF. The download program handles its own  
pacing, so the setting for pacing does not matter.  
2. Put the floppy disk into an appropriate drive.  
3. Make sure that the floppy disk is your current drive (for example, type  
"A:"and press ENTER).  
4. Execute the device downloader program (type "VXIDLD"and press  
ENTER).  
5. The downloader program will check to make sure that there are no  
device drivers already loaded, and no memory has been allocated for  
NRAM or RDISK. If either condition exists, the program will issue a  
warning and abort. If not, it will create the required RAM partitions,  
reboot the system, and download the device driver on the supplied disk.  
Any errors encountered while downloading will be reported.  
6. The download program will check to make sure that the driver has been  
downloaded and is in memory.  
WARNING  
Terminate and Stay Resident programs in your MS-DOS system may  
interfere with the timing of RS-232 transfers and cause errors in the  
downloading. If you encounter errors indicating that the download  
program did not receive back what it expected, and the driver is not  
loaded, remove all of your TSRs from memory and try the download  
procedure again.  
5-6 Downloading Device Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Downloading  
Drivers in GPIB  
Systems with  
IBASIC  
The device driver download program AUTOST provided on the disk with the  
driver files for use with GPIB must be run from IBASIC (Instrument Basic). It  
will set up the the required device driver memory and any other memory  
partitions defined in the configuration file, reboot the system, and download the  
device driver. This program will issue a warning and abort if any errors are  
encountered. If there are device drivers present, or if you already have memory  
allocated for NRAM (User Non-volatile RAM) or RDISK (RAM Disk), you  
must first clear any existing drivers from the system, and then download all of  
the required drivers together. You may redefine any NRAM or RDISK areas  
after downloading the device drivers.  
NOTE  
If you wish to see the messages that the download program generates, you need  
to have a terminal connected to the IBASIC display port. If you have not  
changed this from its default value of NONE, messages are sent to the built-in  
RS-232 port.  
1. Make sure that your Command Module (E1405) is set to System  
Controller mode.  
2. Put the floppy disk into an appropriate drive.  
3. Make sure that the floppy disk is your current drive (for example, type  
MSI ":,700,1"’ and press ENTER).  
4. Load the device download program into IBASIC (type GET  
"AUTOST"and press ENTER) and run the program (type "RUN"and  
press ENTER).  
5. The download program will check to make sure that there are no device  
drivers already loaded, and no memory has been allocated for NRAM or  
RDISK. If either condition exists, the program will issue a warning and  
abort. If not, it will create the required RAM partitions, reboot the  
system, and download the device driver on the supplied disk.  
Any errors encountered while downloading will be reported and will  
cause the program to abort.  
6. The download program will check to make sure that the driver has been  
downloaded and is in memory.  
NOTE  
If you are using IBASIC but controlling the system over the GPIB, you must put  
all commands in quotes and prefix them with "PROG:EXEC". A typical  
command would be:  
PROG:EXEC ’MSI ":,700,1"’  
Downloading Device Drivers 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Downloading  
Drivers in GPIB  
Systems with BASIC  
The device driver download program VXIDLD_GET provided on the disk with  
the driver files for use with GPIB must be run from an BASIC other than  
IBASIC. It will set up the the required device driver memory and any other  
memory partitions defined in the configuration file, reboot the system, and  
download the device driver. If there are device drivers present, or you already  
have memory allocated for NRAM (User Non-volatile RAM) or RDISK (RAM  
Disk), a warning will be issued and the downloading process aborted. You must  
first clear any existing drivers from the system, and then download all of the  
required drivers together. You may redefine any NRAM or RDISK areas after  
downloading the device drivers.  
1. Make sure that your Command Module (E1405) is not set to System  
Controller mode.  
2. Put the floppy disk into an appropriate drive.  
3. Make sure that the floppy disk is your current drive (for example, type  
MSI ":,700,1"’ and press ENTER).  
4. Load the device download program into BASIC (type GET  
"VXIDLD_GET"and press ENTER) and run the program (type "RUN"  
and press ENTER).  
5. The download program will check to make sure that there are no device  
drivers already loaded, and no memory has been allocated for NRAM or  
RDISK. If not, it will create the required RAM partitions, reboot the  
system, and download the device driver on the supplied disk.  
Any errors encountered while downloading will be reported and will  
cause the program to abort.  
6. The download program will check to make sure that the device driver was  
successfully downloaded.  
5-8 Downloading Device Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Downloading  
Multiple Drivers  
The driver downloader software automatically checks for the existence of other  
drivers when it is run. If there are device drivers present, it will abort the process  
and inform you that you must first clear the other device drivers out of the  
mainframe and then download all of the required drivers at once. The easiest  
way to accomplish this is to place copies of all of the device drivers into a single  
directory on your hard disk along with the downloader, or onto the same floppy  
disk. The download program will look in its own directory first, and download  
any device drivers it finds.  
1. Move all of your device drivers into a single directory with the  
downloaders.  
2. Clear the DRAM memory in the mainframe (send  
"DIAG:DRAM:CRE 0"and "DIAG:BOOT"to the System Instrument).  
3. Execute or load and run the appropriate device driver software, as  
described above.  
All device drivers in the directory or on the same floppy disk as the driver  
downloader will be downloaded automatically after the system checks to make  
sure that there are no other device drivers already loaded. You can change  
several aspects of the downloading procedure by editing the configuration file .  
1
Checking Driver  
Status  
Once your drivers are downloaded, you can use the System Instrument  
command DIAG:DRIV:LIST? to check their status. In the format shown, this  
command lists all types of drivers. You can specify the type (ALL, RAM or  
ROM) by using DIAG:DRIV:LIST:type?  
NOTE:  
DIAG:DRIV:LIST? lists all drivers in the system.  
DIAG:DRIV:LIST:RAM? lists all drivers found in the RAM driver table  
DRAM. These are the drivers which you just downloaded into the system.  
DIAG:DRIV:LIST:ROM? lists all drivers found in the ROM driver table.  
These drivers are always present in the system. If one of these is meant  
for an instrument which also has a driver in RAM, the driver in RAM will  
be used by the system.  
Downloading Device Drivers 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Manually  
Downloading a  
Driverdown manual  
Download programs are supplied for use with the system setups described  
earlier in this chapter. If you have a system setup that does not allow the use of  
one of the supplied download programs (for instance, if you are using a  
Macintosh® computer), you will need to manually download the driver. The  
details of this process will be different for different system setups, but the basic  
procedures are outlined below.  
Preparing Memory for Before you can manually download any drivers using either RS-232 or GPIB,  
you must define the DRAM (Driver RAM) into which the drivers will be  
transferred. DRAM memory is non-volatile.  
Manual Downloading  
1. Calculate the required total DRAM size. This is the total amount of  
memory required by the mainframe for all of the device drivers you are  
going to download.  
Typical driver size will range from 40Kbytes to 100Kbytes. If you are in  
doubt about the amount of memory needed for downloading your device  
drivers, use the size of the GPIB driver file (ends in "DU") on the driver  
disks. Remember that you must add the amount of memory necessary for  
all of the device drivers you plan to download. You can see how much  
RAM is available by using the DIAG:DRAM:CRE? MAX, DEF query.  
NOTE  
Each driver will need additional system RAM at run time. Although this is not  
part of the RAM necessary for the DRAM calculations, you should make sure  
that you have enough DRAM to download the drivers, and enough system RAM  
left after downloading to run the drivers. Most drivers will need less than  
15Kbytes of additional RAM (per driver) at run time. If IBASIC is in the  
system, it will take at least 150Kbytes to 200Kbytes of system RAM in addition  
to the RAM used by the device drivers.  
2. Create the appropriate DRAM partition using the DIAG:DRAM:CRE  
command. Unless you have more than eight drivers to download, you do  
not need to specify the second parameter.  
WARNING  
Creating this memory partition will delete any NRAM or RDISK  
partitions that you have defined, and any data in NRAM or RDISK  
memory. You must redefine any such memory blocks after you have  
defined the Driver RAM.  
3. Reboot the system  
5-10 Downloading Device Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manually Downloading Manually downloading a driver over GPIB is fairly straightforward. This  
discussion assumes that the downloadable device driver has been supplied by  
Over GPIB  
Agilent. Drivers supplied by Agilent are formatted so that you just need to  
transfer the driver to command module memory. You must also have the driver  
on media that is accessible to the host computer that will be controlling the  
download.  
You should send a *RST command and a *CLS command to the SYSTEM  
instrument to put it in a known state before beginning your download.  
On most computers, a program will be required for the actual download  
process. Since the driver file contains the System Instrument command to start  
the downloading and the actual data to download, this program just needs to  
transfer the bytes in the driver file to the System Instrument, one byte at a time.  
This file contains the SCPI command DIAG:DRIV:LOAD followed by the  
IEEE 488.2 arbitrary definite block header, and then the actual driver. The  
definite block starts with the # character, followed by a single digit that shows  
how many digits are in the length field, followed in turn by the length field. For  
instance, a block that is 1000 bytes long would have a block header of  
# 800001000.  
When your transfer program is complete you should send the SCPI query  
SYST:ERR? to make sure that there were no errors during the download, and  
reboot the system (send DIAG:BOOT). You can make sure that all of your  
drivers have been properly loaded into Driver RAM by sending the SCPI  
command DIAG:DRIV:LIST:RAM?  
Manually Downloading Manually downloading a driver over RS-232 is similar in concept to  
downloading over GPIB. Drivers supplied by Agilent are formatted so that you  
Over RS-232  
just need to transfer them to command module memory. You must also have the  
driver on media that is accessible to the host computer that will be controlling  
the download.  
However, the RS-232 interface of the E1405 uses special control characters  
(e.g., < CTRL-C> to implement the equivalent of the GPIB "device clear"  
function) that would cause havoc in the download process if sent as part of the  
driver. The driver file on the distribution disk that ends in "DC" is specially  
formatted for RS-232 downloading to avoid this problem (see Appendix E  
"Formatting Binary Data for RS-232" for more information on the data format of  
these files).  
Transmission Format You need to make sure that the transmission format of your computer matches  
the format used at the System Instrument. The default configuration for the  
System Instrument after a DIAG:BOOT:COLD command has been issued is  
9600 BAUD  
8 data bits  
1 stop bit  
Parity checking is OFF  
XON/XOFF pacing  
Downloading Device Drivers 5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are going to use any other setting, you must set up the appropriate settings  
in the System Instrument using the following commands  
COMM:SER[n]:REC:BAUD < rate>  
COMM:SER[n]:REC:SBITS < bits>  
DIAG:COMM STOR  
sets BAUD rate  
sets number of stop bits  
saves settings so they will be  
kept through a reboot.  
NOTE  
Because the special formatting for binary files uses all 8 bits, the number of data  
bits must be set to 8 and parity checking must remain OFF for the driver files to  
transfer properly.  
Pacing the Data Since the RS-232 interface is asynchronous, it is possible for the computer that is  
doing the download to overrun the System Instrument. This would cause part of  
the driver to be lost. To prevent this from happening, you should enable  
hardware handshake (either RTS or DTR) or software handshake  
(XON/XOFF).  
The default configuration for the E1405 Command Module is for software  
handshake enabled and hardware handshake disabled. To make sure that  
software handshake is enabled for the command module use the  
SYST:COMM:SER:PACE? query. To set up software handshake you can use  
the following commands:  
SYST:COMM:SER:PACE:THR:STOP? MAX  
to find the maximum number of characters to fill the input  
buffer.  
SYST:COMM:SER:PACE:THR:STOP < max-20>  
to set the threshold for stopping data to the maximum size of  
the input buffer minus 20 characters.  
SYST:COMM:SER:PACE:THR:STAR 0  
to set the start buffer level to zero. This makes sure that the  
input buffer is completely flushed whenever transmissions are  
stopped.  
SYST:COMM:SER:PACE:XON  
to enable the software handshake protocol.  
The start threshold is not critical as long as it is less than the stop threshold. The  
stop threshold must be set low enough to handle the maximum number of  
characters that are likely to be received at the System Instrument after it sends  
the XOFF signal.  
Hardware handshake can be set up to use either the DTR (Data Terminal  
Ready) line or the RTS (Ready to Send) line. These modes can be set with the  
SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:DTR IBFULL command (to set for DTR) or  
SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:RTS IBFULL command (to set for RTS). You may  
wish to turn software handshake OFF using the  
SYST:COMM:SER:PACE NONE command, though the system will operate  
with both protocols enabled. When the input buffer of the System Instrument is  
not full (number of characters in the input buffer is less than the high  
threshold), the specified hardware line will be asserted. When either hardware  
5-12 Downloading Device Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
handshake mode is enabled, the System Instrument will not transmit characters  
when either the CTS (Clear to Send) or the DSR (Data Set Ready) lines are not  
asserted. This acts to pace the System Instrument output.  
NOTE  
The E1405 Command Module RS-232 interface is implemented as a DTE (Data  
Terminating Equipment). Since most computer RS-232 interfaces are also  
implemented as DTEs, a cable that does line swapping (null modem cable) is  
usually used to connect the computer to the instrument. This cable typically  
swaps the receive and transmit lines. It will usually connect the DTR line of one  
interface to the CTS and DSR lines of the other. It will connect the RTS line of  
one interface to the DCD (Data Carrier Detect) line of the other.  
CAUTION  
The RS-232 interface of the E1405 Command Module will echo any characters  
received with an ASCII value greater than 32 and less than 128. Carriage returns  
are echoed as carriage return/linefeed. When transferring the driver file, these  
echoes can fill up the RS-232 receive buffer of your computer if they are not  
read. If receive pacing is enabled for your computer this could cause the  
computer to send the "Stop Transmitting"signal to the System Instrument, which  
could block the remaining downloaded bytes or other commands sent after the  
download. Since the driver file contains command strings and many carriage  
returns that will be echoed by the system, your program should read the  
returning echo characters from the RS-232 line. This will also let you determine  
if there are any error messages coming back.  
Transmitting Using a COPY On some computers it is possible to use an RS-232 or GPIB port and the copy  
Command  
command to transfer the device driver. Hardware or software handshake must  
be used by the copy command on the computer doing the downloading, and the  
same handshake mode must be enabled on the System Instrument.  
1. Set the required handshake mode and data format (e.g., on DOS systems  
use the MODE command).  
2. Type "COPY filename port" to transfer the file through the RS-232 port  
to the System Instrument (e.g., on a DOS system you might use "COPY  
/B filename.DC COM1:"). This command may be slightly different  
depending on the type of computer being used.  
NOTE  
Since errors are echoed immediately, this method of transfer has no means of  
trapping errors.  
Downloading Device Drivers 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmitting Using a CAT On HP-UX systems you can use the cat command to transfer the device driver.  
Command  
The appropriate device file must exist. All shell commands are assumed to be  
executed from either the /bin/sh or /bin/ksh shell.  
1. Start a process that opens the device file to be used. This process should  
keep the device file open long enough for the transfer to begin. This step  
is done so that the following command to set the device file  
configurations will remain in effect for the transfer. A command that will  
do this is:  
(cat < device file > /dev/null; sleep 1000) &  
2. Set the required configuration of the device file using the stty command  
The following command will set the device file to work with the default  
System Instrument configuration.  
stty -opost 9600 ixon -ixoff cs8 -cstopb ignpar < device file  
3. Transfer the file to the System instrument with the cat command.  
cat filename > device file  
Transmitting Using Custom If the COPY command on your computer cannot directly implement  
Software  
handshaking, or if you wish to trap errors and abort or otherwise modify the  
transmission process, you must use a program to handle the download process.  
This procedure assumes that your computer has some means of looking at data  
being echoed from the System Instrument, and can check for a return character  
without having to have a character returned. Since the actual driver file bytes  
sent over the RS-232 interface are not echoed, the lack of ability to do this  
would put the system into an infinite wait at the first byte that was not echoed.  
1. Set up the appropriate handshake mode and data format on your system,  
and the matching handshake mode in the System Instrument.  
2. Transfer the driver file over the RS-232 interface using a program that  
follows the outline in figure 5-3.  
Check Driver Status Make sure that the drivers were properly downloaded by checking their status  
using the DIAG:DRIV:LIST:RAM? command. This will give you a list of all the  
drivers currently found in DRAM.  
5-14 Downloading Device Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 5-3. Manually Downloading a Device Driver  
Downloading Device Drivers 5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-16 Downloading Device Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
About this Chapter  
This chapter shows how to control instruments in the mainframe from an  
external computer using IEEE 488.2 Common Commands and the GPIB  
interface. This includes how to monitor instrument status, interrupt the  
computer, and synchronize one or more instruments to an external computer.  
Command references for the supported IEEE 488.2 Common Commands and  
IEEE 488.2 GPIB Messages are located near the end of this chapter. This  
chapter contains the following sections:  
Programming Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Instrument Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Clearing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Interrupting the External Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Synchronizing an External Computer and Instruments. . . . . . 6-12  
Note  
Examples that require showing a computer language are written for HP 9000  
Series 200/300 Computers using BASIC language.  
1
Programming Hints  
Only one instrument in the mainframe can be the addressed listener (i.e.,  
receiving commands) on the GPIB at any one time.  
After executing a query command (any command that generates data),  
do not attempt to execute another command until you have read the data  
generated by the query command. Doing so causes the -410: Query  
INTERRUPTED error. You can however, send a command following a  
query command if they are combined in the same command string (joined  
by semicolon and colon).  
Instruments in the mainframe have 128 character input buffers. Do not  
send a command string containing a query command that is longer than  
128 characters. Doing so may cause a deadlock situation which can only  
be resolved by setting a timeout on the computers enter statements and  
then reading the error(s) after the timeout occurs.  
Controlling Instruments Using GPIB 6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Status System  
Structure  
The instrument status structure monitors important events for an instrument  
such as when an error occurs or when a reading is available. All instruments  
have the following status groups and registers within those groups:  
Status Byte Status Group  
status byte register  
service request enable register  
Standard Event Status Group  
standard event status register  
standard event status enable register  
Operation Status Group  
condition register  
event register  
enable register  
Questionable Data Status Group  
condition register  
event register  
enable register  
You read and configure the registers in the Status Byte and Standard Event  
groups using Common Commands. These are the most commonly used  
instrument registers. The registers in the Standard Operation Status group and  
Questionable Data status group are configured using the commands in the  
STATus subsystem.  
NOTE  
The Status Byte, Standard Event, and Operation Status groups are the only  
groups covered in this chapter. The Questionable Data status group is  
supported by the system instrument (Command Module) but is not used by the  
system instrument. Commands affecting this status group (Chapter 5) are  
accepted but have no effect.  
Refer to the STATus subsystem in the Command Reference of the individual  
plug-in module manuals to determine how a module uses the Operation Status  
group and Questionable Data status groups. If the STAT:OPER or  
STAT:QUES commands are not documented in the plug-in module manual,  
that module does not use the registers.  
6-2 Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Status Byte As shown in Figure 4-1, the Status Byte register is the highest-level register in  
the status structure. This register contains bits which summarize information  
from the other status groups.  
Register  
NOTE  
The bits in the other status group registers must be specifically enabled to be  
reported in the Status Byte register. Refer to "Unmasking Standard Event Status  
Bits"(later in this chapter) for more information.  
Status Byte Register  
Bit 0 Instrument Specific  
Bit 1 Instrument Specific  
Bit 2 Instrument Specific  
Bit 3 Questionable Data Summary Bit  
Bit 4 Message Available  
Bit 5 Standard Event Summary Bit  
Bit 6 Service Request  
Bit 7 Operation Status Summary Bit  
Operation Status Group  
Standard Event Status Group  
Questionable Data Status Group (not used)  
Figure 6-1. Status Structure  
Controlling Instruments Using GPIB 6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 4-1 shows each of the Status Byte register bits and describes the event that  
will set each bit.  
Table 4-1. Status Byte Register  
Bit  
Decimal  
Number Weight Description  
0
1
2
3
1
2
4
8
Instrument Specific (not used by most instruments)  
Instrument Specific (not used by most instruments)  
Instrument Specific (not used by most instruments)  
Questionable Data Status Group Summary Bit. One or more events  
in the Questionable Data Status group have occurred and set  
bit(s) in those registers.  
4
16  
Message Available. The instruments output queue contains  
information. This bit can be used to synchronize data exchange  
with an external computer. For example, you can send a query  
command to the instrument and then wait for this bit to be set.  
The GPIB is then available for other use while the program is  
waiting for the instrument to respond.  
5
6
32  
64  
Standard Event Status Group Summary Bit. One or more enabled  
events in the Standard Event Status Register have occurred and  
set bit(s) in that register.  
Service Request--Service is requested by the instrument and the  
GPIB SRQ line is set true. This bit will be set when any other bit  
of the Status Byte Register is set and has been enable to assert  
SRQ by the *SRE command.  
7
128  
Operation Status Group Summary Bit. One or more events in the  
Operation Status Group have occurred and set bit(s) in those  
registers.  
Reading the Status You can read the Status Byte register using either the *STB? command or an  
GPIB serial poll. Both methods return the decimal weighted sum of all set bits in  
Byte Register  
the register. The difference between the two methods is that *STB? does not  
clear bit 6 (Service Request); serial poll does clear bit 6. No other status register  
bits are cleared by either method with the exception of the Message Available  
bit (bit 4) which may be cleared as a result of reading the response to *STB?. In  
addition, using an GPIB serial poll lets you read the status byte without  
interrupting the instrument parser. The *STB? method requires the instrument  
to process the command. This can generate interrupt query errors if the  
instrument is executing another query.  
The following program uses the *STB? command to read the contents of the  
system instruments (Command Modules) Status Byte register.  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*STB?"  
20 ENTER 70900; A  
30 PRINT A  
Read Status Byte Register  
Enter weighted sum  
Print weighted sum  
40 END  
For example, assume bit 3 (weight = 8) and bit 7 (weight = 128) are set. The  
above program returns the sum of the two weights (136).  
6-4 Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following program reads the system instruments Status Byte register using  
the GPIB Serial Poll command.  
10 P= SPOLL(70900)  
Read Status Byte Register using  
Serial Poll, place weighted sum  
in P  
20 PRINT P  
30 END  
Print weighted sum  
Service Request The Service Request Enable register is used to "unmask"bits in the Status Byte  
register. When an unmasked Status Byte register bit is set to 1’, a service  
request is sent to the computer over GPIB.  
Enable Register  
The command used to unmask Status Byte register bits is:  
*SRE < mask>  
where < mask> is the decimal weight of the bit to be unmasked, or is the sum  
of the decimal weights if multiple bits are to be unmasked. For example,  
executing:  
*SRE 16  
unmasks the message available (MAV) bit in the Status Byte register. Sending:  
*SRE 48  
unmasks the message available (MAV) and event status bit (ESB).  
You can determine which bits in the Status Byte register are unmasked by  
sending the command:  
*SRE?  
This command returns the decimal weighted sum of all unmasked bits.  
The Service Note that the Service Request bit (bit 6) in the Status Byte register does not  
have a mask. Bit 6 is set any time another Status Byte register bit is set. If the  
other bit which is set is unmasked, a service request is generated.  
Request Bit  
Clearing the Service The Service Request Enable register mask is cleared (each bit masked except  
bit 6) by sending the command:  
Request Enable  
Register  
*SRE 0  
If *PSC 1 has been executed, the Service Request Enable register mask is  
cleared when power is cycled. If *PSC 0 has been executed, the mask is  
unchanged when power is cycled. (*PSC? queries the setting.)  
Controlling Instruments Using GPIB 6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Event Status The Standard Event Status Register in the Standard Event status group  
monitors the instrument status events shown in Table 4-2. When one of these  
events occurs, it sets a corresponding bit in the Standard Event Status Register.  
Register  
NOTE  
The Standard Event Status Register bits are not reported in the Status Byte  
Register unless unmasked by the Standard Event Status Enable Register. Refer  
to the section "Unmasking Standard Event Status Bits"for more information.  
Table 4-2. Standard Event Status Register  
Bit  
Decimal  
Number Weight Description  
0
1
2
3
1
2
4
8
Operation Complete. The instrument has completed all pending  
operations. This bit is set in response to the *OPC command.  
Request Control. An instrument is requesting permission to become  
the active GPIB controller.  
Query Error. A problem has occurred in the instruments output  
queue.  
Device Dependent Error. An instrument operation did not  
complete possibly because of an abnormal hardware or firmware  
condition (overload occurred, self-test failure, loss of calibration  
or configuration memory, etc.)  
4
5
16  
32  
Execution Error. The instrument cannot do the operation(s)  
requested by a command.  
Command Error. The instrument cannot understand or execute the  
command.  
6
7
64  
User Request. The instrument is under local (front panel) control.  
128  
Power-On. Power has been applied to the instrument. You must  
execute the *PSC 0 command to the System Instrument to allow  
this bit to remain enabled when power is cycled. See the *PSC  
command later in this chapter for an example.  
8-15  
Reserved for future use (always return zero).  
Unmasking Standard To allow any of the Standard Event Status register bits to set bit 5 (ESB) of the  
Status Byte register, you must first unmask the bit(s) using the Standard Event  
Status Enable register with the command:  
Event Status Bits  
*ESE  
For example, suppose your application requires an interrupt whenever any type  
of error occurs. The error related bits in the Standard Event Status register are  
bits 2 through 5. The sum of the decimal weights of these bits is 60. You can  
enable any one of these bits to set bit 5 in the Status Byte Register by sending:  
*ESE 60  
If you want to generate a service request following any one of these errors, you  
can do so by unmasking bit 5 (ESB) in the Status Byte register:  
*SRE 32  
*ESE 60  
Now, whenever an error occurs, it will set one of the bits 2 - 5 in the Standard  
Event Status register which will set bit 5 in the Status Byte register. Since bit 5 is  
6-6 Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
unmasked, an GPIB service request (SRQ) will be generated. ("Interrupting the  
External Computer", later in this chapter contains an example program which  
demonstrates this sequence).  
Note that the Standard Event Status Register bits that are not unmasked still  
respond to their corresponding conditions. They do not, however, set bit 5 in the  
Status Byte Register.  
Reading the Standard You can determine which bits in the Standard Event Status register are  
unmasked with the command:  
Event Status Enable  
Register Mask  
*ESE?  
This command returns the decimal weighted sum of all unmasked bits.  
The Standard Event Status Enable register is cleared (all bits masked) by  
sending the command:  
*ESE 0  
Reading the Standard You can determine which bits in the Standard Event Status register are set using  
the command:  
Event Status Register  
*ESR?  
This command returns the decimal weighted sum of all set bits. *ESR? clears  
the register. *CLS also clears the register.  
Both of these commands return the decimal weighted sum of all set or enabled  
bits.  
Operation Status The registers in the Standard Operation Status Group provide information  
about the state of measurement functions within an instrument. These functions  
are represented by bits in the Condition register which is described in Table 4-3.  
Group  
The System Instrument (Command Module) only uses bit 8 in the Condition  
register. Bit 8 (when set) indicates that an interrupt set up by the  
DIAGnostic:INTerrupt commands has occurred and has been acknowledged.  
NOTE  
The registers in the Operation Status Group and the DIAGnostic:INTerrupt  
commands are only used when, for a specific VXIbus interrupt line, it is  
necessary to replace the operating systems interrupt service routine with the  
System Instruments service routine. Agilent VXIbus devices used with the  
Command Module use the operating system service routine. The VXIbus  
interrupt line that is used by these devices (primarily line 1), should not be used  
with the DIAGnostic:INTerrupt commands.  
The DIAGnostic:INTerrupt commands are covered in Chapter 5.  
Controlling Instruments Using GPIB 6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 4-3. Operation Status Group - Condition Register  
Bit  
Decimal  
Number Weight Description  
0
1
2
Calibrating  
1
Settling  
2
4
Ranging  
3
4
8
Sweeping  
16  
32  
64  
128  
256  
Measuring  
5
Waiting for TRG  
Waiting for ARM  
Correcting  
6
7
8
Interrupt acknowledged (System Instrument)  
Instrument Dependent  
Reserved  
9-12  
13-14  
15  
Always zero  
Reading the When an event monitored by the Condition register has occurred or is  
occurring, a corresponding bit in the register is set. The bit which is set can be  
Condition Register  
determined with the command:  
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?  
The data which is returned is the decimal weighted sum of the set bit. Since bit 8  
is the only bit used by system instrument, 256 is returned if the bit is set.  
Bit 8 in the Condition register is cleared with the command:  
DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:RESPonse?  
Unmasking the When a condition monitored by the condition register occurs, a corresponding  
bit in the Operation Status Group Event register is automatically set. In order  
for this condition to generate a service request, the bit in the Event register must  
be unmasked using the Operation Status Group Enable register. This is done  
using the command:  
Operation Event  
Register Bits  
STATus:OPERation:ENABle < event>  
where event is the decimal weight of the bit to be unmasked. Since the system  
instrument only uses bit 8, the only useful value of event is 256.  
When bit 8 is set and is unmasked, it sets bit 7 in the Status Byte register in the  
Status Byte Group.  
Bits in the Operation Status Group Event register which are unmasked can be  
determined with the command:  
STATus:OPERation:ENABle?  
The command returns the decimal weighted sum of the unmasked bit(s).  
6-8 Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bits in the Operation Status Group Event register which are set can be  
determined with the command:  
STATus:OPERation:EVENt?  
This command returns the decimal weighted sum of the set bit(s).  
Clearing the Operation Bits in the Operation Status Group Event register are cleared with the  
command:  
Event Register Bits  
STATus:OPERation:EVENt?  
or the bits can be cleared with the command:  
*CLS  
The Operation Status Group Enable register is cleared (all bits masked) by  
sending the command:  
STATus:OPERation:ENABle 0  
Using the Operation The following example shows the sequence of commands used to setup and  
respond to an interrupt using the system instrument interrupt servicing routine.  
Status Group Registers  
NOTE  
An interrupt handler must be assigned to handle the interrupt on the VXIbus  
backplane interrupt line specified. See "Interrupt Line Allocation" in Chapter 2  
for more information.  
!Call computer subprogram Intr_resp when a service request  
! is received due to an interrupt on a VXIbus backplane  
! interrupt line.  
ON INTR 7 CALL Intr_resp  
ENABLE INTR 7;2  
!Unmask bit 7 in the Status Byte register so that a service  
! request (SRQ) will occur when an interrupt occurs.  
!Unmask bit 8 in the Operation Status Group Enable register  
!so that when the interrupt occurs it will set bit 7 in the  
!Status Byte register.  
OUTPUT 70900; "*SRE 128"  
OUTPUT 70900; "STAT:OPER:ENAB 256"  
!Set up interrupt line 5 and enable interrupt response data  
!to be generated.  
OUTPUT 70900; "DIAG:INT:SETUP5 ON"  
OUTPUT 70900; "DIAG:INT:ACT ON"  
.
. (Program which executes until interrupt occurs)  
.
!Computer service request routine which does an SPOLL  
!to determine the cause of the interrupt, then reads  
!(and clears) the Operation Event register to determine which  
!event occurred, and then reads the interrupt acknowledge  
! response (which also clears condition register bit 8).  
Controlling Instruments Using GPIB 6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUB Intr_resp  
B= SPOLL(70900)  
OUTPUT 70900; "STAT:OPER:EVEN?"  
ENTER 70900; E  
OUTPUT 70900; "DIAG:INTR:RESP?"  
ENTER 70900; R  
.
.
.
SUBEND  
1
Clearing Status  
The *CLS command clears all status registers (Standard Event Status Register,  
Standard Operation Status Event Register, Questionable Data Status Event  
Register) and the error queue for an instrument. This clears the corresponding  
summary bits (bits 3, 5, & 7) and the instrument-specific bits (bits 0, 1, & 2) in  
the Status Byte Register. *CLS does not affect which bits are enabled to be  
reflected in the Status Byte Register or enabled to assert SRQ.  
1
Interrupting an  
External Computer  
When a bit in the status byte register is set and has been enabled to assert SRQ  
(*SRE command), the instrument sets the GPIB SRQ line true. Interrupts can  
be used to alert an external computer to suspend its present operation and find  
out what service the instrument requires. (Refer to your computer/language  
manuals for information on how to program the computer to respond to the  
interrupt.)  
To allow any of the status byte register bits to set the SRQ line true, you must  
first enable the bit(s) with the *SRE command. For example, suppose your  
application requires an interrupt whenever a message is available in the  
instruments output queue (status byte register bit 4). The decimal weight of this  
bit is 16. You can enable bit 4 to assert SRQ by sending:  
*SRE 16  
NOTE  
You can determine which bits are enabled in the Status Register using *SRE?.  
This command returns the decimal weighted sum of all enabled bits.  
6-10 Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example: Interrupting when an Error Occurs  
This program shows how to interrupt an external computer whenever an error  
occurs for the instrument being programmed which, in this example, is a  
multimeter at secondary address 03.  
10 OPTION BASE 1  
!A rray num bering starts with 1  
20 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg  
!When SRQ occurs on interface 7, call subprogram  
30 ENABLE INTR 7;2  
!Enable SRQ interrupt, interface 7  
40 OUTPUT 70903;"*SRE 32"  
!Enable bit 5 (Standard Event Status Bit) in Status Byte  
Register  
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*ESE 60"  
!Enable error bits (bits 2-5) in Standard Event Status Register  
to be reflected  
! in Status Byte Register  
60 OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:TEMP? TC,T,(@104)"  
!Measure temperature with voltmeter  
70 WAIT 2  
80 ENTER 70903;Tmp_rdg  
90 PRINT Tmp_rdg  
100 END  
!Enter temperature reading  
!Print temperature reading  
110 SUB Errmsg  
120 DIM Message$[256]  
130 CLEAR 70903  
140 B= SPOLL(70903)  
!Serial poll multimeter (clears SRQ)  
150 REPEAT  
!Create array for error m essage  
!Clear multimeter  
!Repeat next 3 lines until error number = 0  
160  
170  
180  
OUTPUT 70903;"SYST:ERR?"  
!Read error from queue  
ENTER 70903;Code,Message$ !Enter error num ber & m essage  
PRINT Code,Message$  
!Print error num ber & m essage  
!Clear status structures  
190 UNTIL Code= 0  
200 OUTPUT 70903;"*CLS"  
210 STOP  
220 SUBEND  
Controlling Instruments Using GPIB 6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Synchronizing an  
External Computer  
and Instruments  
The *OPC? and *OPC commands (operation complete commands) allow you  
to maintain synchronization between an external computer and an instrument.  
The *OPC? query places an ASCII character 1 into the instruments output  
queue when all pending instrument operations are finished. By requiring the  
computer to read this response before continuing program execution, you can  
ensure synchronization between one or more instruments and an external  
computer.  
The *OPC command sets bit 0 (Operation Complete Message) in the Standard  
Event Status Register when all pending instrument operations are finished. By  
enabling this bit to be reflected in the Status Byte Register, you can ensure  
synchronization using the GPIB serial poll function.  
Example: Synchronizing an External Computer and Two Instruments  
using the OPC? query.  
This example uses a D to A Converter module (DAC) at secondary address 09  
and a Scanning Voltmeter at secondary address 03. The application requires the  
DAC to output a voltage to a device under test. After the voltage is applied, the  
voltmeter measures the response from the device under test. The *OPC?  
command ensures that the voltage measurement will be made only after the  
voltage is applied by the DAC.  
10 OUTPUT 70909;"SOUR:VOLT1 5;*OPC?"  
!Configure DAC to output 5 volts on channel 1; place 1 in  
output  
!queue when done  
20 ENTER 70909;A  
!Wait for *OPC? response  
30 OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@104)"  
!Measure DC voltage on device under test  
40 ENTER 70903;A  
!Enter voltage reading  
50 PRINT A  
!Print reading  
60 END  
6-12 Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example: Synchronizing an External Computer and Two Instruments  
using the *OPC command.  
This example uses the *OPC command and serial poll to synchronize an  
external computer and two instruments (DAC at secondary address 09;  
Scanning Voltmeter at secondary address 03). The advantage to using this  
method over *OPC? query method is that the computer can do other operations  
while it is waiting for the instrument(s) to complete operations. When using this  
method, the Operation Complete bit (bit 0) must be the only enabled bit in the  
Standard Event Status Register (*ESE 1 command). If other bits (such as error  
bits) are enabled, you must make sure that bit 0 causes the interrupt.  
10 OUTPUT 70909;"*CLS"  
!Clear all status structures on instrument at secondary address  
09  
20 OUTPUT 70909;"*ESE 1"  
!Enable Operation Complete to be reflected in bit 5 of the  
Status Byte Register  
30 OUTPUT 70909;"SOUR:VOLT1 5;*OPC"  
!Configure instrument # 1, set Operation Complete bit when  
done  
40 WHILE NOT BIT(SPOLL(70909),5)  
!While waiting for bit 5 in instruments Status Byte Register to  
be set,  
!computer can do other operations  
50 !(Computer does other operations here)  
60 END WHILE  
70 OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@104)"  
!Measure DC voltage using instrument # 2  
80 END  
Controlling Instruments Using GPIB 6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-14 Controlling Instruments Using GPIB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
System Instrument Command Reference  
About This Chapter  
This chapter describes the Standard Commands for Programmable  
Instruments (SCPI) command set and the IEEE 488.2 Common Commands for  
the System Instrument. The System Instrument is part of the Agilent  
E1300/E1301 Mainframes internal control processor and is therefore always  
present in a Mainframe. This chapter contains the following sections:  
Command Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
SCPI Command Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Common Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65  
GPIB Message Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72  
Command Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75  
1
Command Types  
Commands are separated into two types: IEEE 488.2 Common Commands and  
SCPI Commands.  
Common Command The IEEE 488.2 standard defines the Common commands that perform  
functions like reset, self-test, status byte query, etc. Common commands are four  
Format  
or five characters in length, always begin with the asterisk character (*), and may  
include one or more parameters. The command keyword is separated from the  
first parameter by a space character. Some examples of Common commands are  
shown below:  
*RST, *ESE < mask> , *STB?  
SCPI Command Format The SCPI commands perform functions like closing switches, making  
measurements, and querying instrument states or retrieving data. A subsystem  
command structure is a hierarchical structure that usually consists of a top level  
(or root) command, one or more lower level commands, and their parameters.  
The following example shows part of a typical subsystem:  
[ROUTe:]  
CLOSe < channel_list>  
SCAN < channel_list>  
:MODE?  
ROUTe: is the root command, CLOSe and SCAN are second level commands  
with parameters, and :MODE? is a third level command.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Separator A colon (:) always separates one command from the next lower level command  
as shown below:  
ROUTe:SCAN:MODE?  
Colons separate the root command from the second level command  
(ROUTe:SCAN) and the second level from the third level (SCAN:MODE?).  
Abbreviated Commands The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and lower  
case letters. The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the  
command. For shorter program lines, send the abbreviated form. For better  
program readability, you may send the entire command. The instrument will  
accept either the abbreviated form or the entire command.  
For example, if the command syntax shows MEASure, then MEAS and  
MEASURE are both acceptable forms. Other forms of MEASure, such as  
MEASU or MEASUR will generate an error. You may use upper or lower case  
letters. Therefore, MEASURE, measure, and MeAsUrE are all acceptable.  
Implied Commands Implied commands appear in square brackets ([ ]) in the command syntax. (The  
brackets are not part of the command, and are not sent to the instrument.)  
Suppose you send a second level command but do not send the preceding  
implied command. In this case, the instrument assumes you intend to use the  
implied command and it responds as if you had sent it. Examine the SOURce  
subsystem shown below:  
[SOURce:]  
PULSe  
:COUNt  
:COUNt?  
:PERiod  
:PERiod?  
The root command SOURce: is an implied command. To set the instruments  
pulse count to 25, you can send either of the following command statements:  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 25  
or  
PULS:COUN 25  
Variable Command Syntax Some commands have what appears to be a variable syntax. For example:  
DIAG:INT:SETup[n]? and SYST:COMM:SERial[n]:BAUD?  
In these commands, the "n"is replaced by a number. No space is left between  
the command and the number because the number is not a parameter. The  
number is part of the command syntax. The purpose of this notation is to save a  
great deal of space in the command reference. In the case of SETup[n], n  
could range from 1 through 7. In SERial[n], n can be from 0 through 7. You  
can send the command without the [n] and a default value will be used by the  
instrument. Some examples:  
DIAG:INT:SETUP2?, DIAG:INT:PRI2 5, SYST:COMM:SER1:BAUD 9600  
Parameters Parameter Types. The following list contains explanations and examples of  
parameter types you will see later in this chapter.  
Numeric Parameters are commonly used decimal representations of  
numbers including optional signs, decimal points, and scientific notation  
7-2 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(e.g., 123, 123E2, -123, -1.23E2, .123, 1.23E-2, 1.23000E- 01). Special  
cases include MIN, MAX, and INFinity. The Comments section within  
the Command Reference will state whether a numeric parameter can also  
be specified in hex, octal, and/or binary. # H7B, # Q173, # B1111011  
Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true  
or false (e.g., ON, OFF, 1, 0). Any non-zero value is considered true.  
Discreet parameters select from a finite number of values. These  
parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting. An example is  
the TRIGger:SOURce < source> command where source can be BUS,  
EXT, HOLD, or IMM.  
Arbitraty Block Program Data parameters are used to transfer blocks of  
data in the form of bytes. The block of data bytes is preceded by a  
preamble which indicates either 1) the number of data bytes which  
follow, or 2) that the following data block will be terminated upon receipt  
of a New Line message with the EOI signal true. The syntax is:  
Definite Length Block  
# < non-zero digit> < digit(s)> < data byte(s)>  
Where the value of < non-zero digit> equals the number of  
< digit(s)> . The value of < digit(s)> taken as a decimal integer  
indicates the number of < data byte(s)> in the block.  
Indefinite Length Block  
# 0< data byte(s)> < NL^ END>  
Examples of sending 4 data bytes:  
# 14< byte> < byte> < byte> < byte>  
# 3004< byte> < byte> < byte> < byte>  
# 0< byte> < byte> < byte> < byte> < NL^ END>  
Optional Parameters. Parameters shown within square brackets ([ ]) are  
optional parameters. (Note that the brackets are not part of the command, and  
are not sent to the instrument.) If you do not specify a value for an optional  
parameter, the instrument chooses a default value. For example, consider the  
ARM:COUNt? [< MIN| MAX> ] command. If you send the command without  
specifying a parameter, the present ARM:COUNt value is returned. If you send  
the MIN parameter, the command returns the minimum count available. If you  
send the MAX parameter, the command returns the maximum count available.  
Be sure to place a space between the command and the parameter.  
Linking Commands Linking IEEE 488.2 Common Commands with SCPI Commands. Use a  
semicolon between the commands. For example:  
*RST;OUTP ON  
or  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD;*TRG  
Linking Multiple SCPI commands. Use both a semicolon and a colon between  
the commands. For example:  
ARM:COUN 1;:TRIG:SOUR EXT  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABORt  
1
SCPI Command  
Reference  
This section describes the SCPI commands for the System Instrument.  
Commands are listed alphabetically by subsystem and also within each  
subsystem. A command guide is printed in the top margin of each page. The  
guide indicates the first command listed on that page.  
ABORt  
The ABORT subsystem is a part of the System Instruments trigger system.  
ABORT resets the trigger system from its Wait For Trigger state to its Idle state  
and aborts any pacer pulse train in progress. ABORt performs the opposite  
function of the INITiate:IMMediate command. INITiate enables the trigger  
system, while ABORt disables it.  
Subsystem Syntax ABORt  
Comments  
ABORt does not affect any other settings of the trigger system. When the  
INITiate command is sent, the trigger system will respond just as it did  
before the ABORt command was sent.  
Related Commands: INITiate, TRIGger  
*RST Condition: ABORT  
Example Stopping Pacer pulses with ABORT  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD  
trigger source is TRIG  
command  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 1E3  
output 1000 Pacer pulses  
pulse period set to .1 second  
go to Wait For Trigger state  
SOUR:PULS:PER .1 S  
INIT  
TRIG  
trigger the Pacer to output  
pulses  
.
.
ABORT  
go to T rigger-Idle state and stop  
Pacer pulses  
7-4 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic  
DIAGnostic  
The DIAGnostic subsystem allows control over the System Instruments internal  
processor system (:BOOT, and :INTerrupt), the allocation and contents of User  
RAM, and, disc volume RAM (:NRAM, and :RDISk), and allocation of the  
built-in serial interface (:COMM:SER:OWNer).  
Subsystem Syntax DIAGnostic  
:BOOT  
:COLD  
[:WARM]  
:COMMunicate  
:SERial[0]  
[:OWNer] [SYSTem| IBASic| NONE]  
[:OWNer]?  
:SERial[n]  
:STORe  
:DOWNload  
:CHECked  
[:MADDress] < address> ,< data>  
:SADDress < address> ,< data>  
[:MADDress] < address> ,< data>  
:SADDress < address> ,< data>  
:DRAM  
:AVAIlable?  
:CREate < size> < num_drivers>  
:CREate? < MIN| MAX> ,< MIN| MAX| DEF>  
:DRIVer  
:LOAD < driver_block>  
:CHECked < driver_block>  
:LIST  
:ALL?  
:RAM?  
:ROM?  
:INTerrupt  
:ACTivate [ON| OFF| 1| 0]  
:SETup[n] [ON| OFF| 1| 0]  
:SETUP[n]?  
:PRIority[n] [< priority> | MIN| MAX| DEF]  
:PRIority[n]? [MIN| MAX| DEF]  
:RESPonse?  
:NRAM  
:ADDRess?  
:CREate < size> | MIN| MAX  
:CREate? [MAX MIN]  
:PEEK? < address> ,< width>  
:POKE < address> ,< width> ,< data>  
:RDISk  
:ADDress?  
:CREate < size> | MIN| MAX  
:CREate? [MIN| MAX]  
:UPLoad  
[:MADDress]? < address> ,< byte_count>  
SADDress? < address> ,< byte_count>  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:BOOT:COLD  
:BOOT:COLD DIAGnostic:BOOT:COLD causes the System Instrument to restart (re-boot).  
Configurations stored in non-volatile memory and RS-232 configurations are  
reset to their default states:  
DRAM, NRAM, and RDISk memory segments are cleared  
Serial Interface parameters set to:  
BAUD 9600  
BITS 8  
PARity NONE  
SBITs 1  
DTR ON  
RTS ON  
PACE XON  
Serial 0 Owner = system  
NOTE  
Resetting the serial interface parameters takes about 0.01 seconds for the  
built-in serial port and 0.75 seconds per serial plug-in card. While this is taking  
place the System Instrument will still respond to serial polls. If you are using a  
serial poll to determine when the cold boot cycle is complete, you should insert a  
delay of 1 second per plug-in serial card (E1324) before polling the system  
instrument. This will prevent incorrectly determining that the system instrument  
has completed its boot cycle.  
Comments  
The System Instrument goes through its power-up self tests.  
Related Commands: DIAG:BOOT:WARM  
Example Re-booting the System Instrument (cold)  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD  
force boot  
7-6 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :BOOT[:WARM]  
:BOOT[:WARM] DIAGnostic:BOOT[:WARM] causes the System Instrument to restart (re-boot)  
using the current configuration stored in non-volatile memory. The effect is the  
same as cycling power.  
Comments  
The System Instrument goes through its power-up self tests.  
The non-volatile system state is used for configuration wherever  
applicable.  
Related Commands: DIAG:BOOT:COLD  
Example Booting the System Instrument (warm)  
DIAG:BOOT:WARM  
force boot  
:COMMunicate DIAGnostic:COMMunicate:SERial[0][:OWNer] < owner > Allocates the  
built-in serial interface to the System Instrument, the optional IBASIC  
interpreter, or to neither.  
:SERial[0][:OWNer]  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
owner  
discrete  
SYSTem| IBASic| NONE  
none  
While the serial interface is allocated to the Command Module  
(SYSTem), it can function as the mainframe user interface when  
connected to a terminal or computer running terminal emulation  
software.  
When the built-in serial interface is allocated to IBASIC, it is controlled  
only by IBASIC. The serial interface is given a select code of 9, and any  
RS-232 device connected to the (Command Module) RS-232 port is  
programmed accordingly.  
If the built-in serial interface is not needed, specifying NONE will release  
memory for use by other instruments.  
Once the new serial interface owner has been specified  
(DIAG:COMM:SER:OWN), the change will not take effect until you  
re-boot (warm) the system.  
Related Commands: DIAGnostic:COMMunicate:SERial[:OWNer]  
Example Give the serial interface to IBASIC.  
DIAG:COMM:SER IBAS  
DIAG:BOOT:WARM  
Note; :OWNer is implied  
Complete the allocation  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:COMMunicate :SERial[0][:OWNer]?  
:COMMunicate DIAGnostic:COMMunicate:SERial[0][:OWNer]? Returns the current "owner"  
of the built-in serial interface. The values returned will be; "SYST", "IBAS", or  
"NO NE ".  
:SERial[0][:OWNer]?  
Comments  
Related Commands: DIAGnostic:SERial[:OWNer]  
Example Determine which instrument has the serial interface.  
DIAG:COMM:SER?  
Note; :OWNer is implied  
enter statement  
statement returns the string  
SYST, IBAS, or NONE  
:COMMunicate DIAGnostic:COMMunicate:SERial[n]:STORe Stores the serial  
communications parameters (e.g. BAUD, BITS, PARity etc.) into non-volatile  
storage for the serial interface specified by [n] in SERial[n].  
:SERial[n]:STORe  
Comments  
Until STORe is executed, communication parameter values are stored  
in volatile memory, and a power failure will cause the settings to be lost.  
DIAG:COMM:SER(1-7):STOR causes an Agilent E1324A (B-size  
RS-232 card) to store its settings in an on-board EEROM. This EEROM  
write cycle takes nearly one second to complete. Wait for this operation  
to complete before attempting to use that serial interface.  
The Agilent E1324As EEROM used to store its serial communication  
settings has a finite lifetime of approximately ten thousand write cycles.  
Even if your application program sent the STORe command once  
every day, the lifetime of the EEROM would still be over 27 years.  
Be careful that your application program sends the STORe command  
to an Agilent E1324A no more often than is necessary.  
Related Commands: all SYST:COMM:SER[n]commands  
Example Store the serial communications settings in the third Agilent E1324A.  
DIAG:COMM:SER3:STOR  
7-8 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :DOWNload:CHECked [:MADDress]  
:DOWNload:CHECked DIAGnostic:CHECked:DOWNload[:MADDress] < address> ,< data> writes  
data into a non-volatile User RAM segment starting at address using error  
correction. The User RAM segment is allocated by the DIAG:NRAM:CREate  
or DIAG:DRAM:CREate command.  
[:MADDress]  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
data  
numeric  
0 to 16,777,215 (# HFFFFFE)  
none  
none  
arbitrary block  
program data  
See "Parameter Types", in the  
beginning of this chapter  
This command is typically used to send a block of data to a block of user  
RAM. It is the only way to send binary data to multiple addresses over a  
serial (RS232C) line.  
CAUTION: Be certain that all of the data you download will be contained  
entirely within the allocated NRAM segment. Writing data outside of the  
NRAM segment will disrupt the operation of the Command Module.  
Most computers terminate an OUTPUT, PRINT, or WRITE statement  
with a carriage return or carriage return and line feed. These  
End-Of-Line characters must be either accounted for (NRAM segment  
sized to accommodate them), or suppressed using an appropriate  
IMAGE or FORMAT statement. Some helpful methods:  
Size the NRAM segment a little larger than the expected data block  
Control the End-Of-Line characters with format statements.  
Use the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format (see  
example) to send your data rather than the Indefinite Length  
Arbitrary Block Program Data format.  
Address may be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary  
(# B) formats. DOWNload is done by word (16 bit) access so address  
must be even.  
Be certain that address specifies a location within the User RAM  
segment allocated using DIAG:NRAM:CREate if you are downloading a  
configuration table. DIAG:DOWNload can change the contents of  
System RAM causing unpredictable results.  
This command can also be used to write data to a device with registers in  
the A16 address space. See :DOWNload:SADDress.  
Related Commands: DIAG:NRAM:CREate, DIAG:NRAM:ADDRess?,  
DIAG:UPLoad?, VXI:CONF:CTABle, VXI:CONF:DCTable,  
VXI:CONF:ITABle, VXI:CONF:MTABle  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:DOWNload:CHECked [:MADDress]  
Byte Format Each byte sent with this command is expected to be in the following format:  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Control Bit  
Check Bits  
Data Bits  
Control Bit is used to indicate the serial driver information such as clear,  
reset, or end of transmission. This bit is ignored by the regular 488.2  
driver . The control bit should be one for regular data.  
Check Bits are used to detect and correct a single bit error. The control  
bit is not included in the check. The check bits are a Hamming single bit  
error correction code, as specified by the following table:  
Data Value  
Check Bits  
0
1
0
7
6
1
5
2
3
4
3
4
5
2
6
1
0
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Data bits are the actual data being transferred (four bits at a time). Each  
word to be written requires four data bytes for transmission. The  
significance of the data is dependant on the order received. The first data  
byte received contains the most significant nibble of the 16 bit word to be  
written (bits 15-12) . The next data byte received contains the least  
significant nibble of the most significant byte of the word (bits 11-8). The  
third data byte received contains the most significant nibble of the least  
significant byte of the word (bits 7-4). The fourth data byte received  
contains the least significant nibble of the least significant byte of the  
word to be written (bits 3-0). Once all four bytes have been received the  
word will be written.  
7-10 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :DOWNload:CHECked :SADDress  
:DOWNload:CHECked DIAGnostic:CHECked:DOWNload:SADDress < address> ,< data> writes data  
to non-volatile User RAM at a single address specified by address using error  
correction. It can also write to devices with registers in the A16 address space.  
:SADDress  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
data  
numeric  
0 to 16,777,215 (# HFFFFFE)  
none  
none  
arbitrary block  
program data  
See "Parameter Types", in the  
beginning of this chapter  
Comments  
This command is typically used to send data to a device which accepts  
data at a single address. It is the only way to send binary data to single  
addresses over a serial (RS232C) line.  
Most computers terminate an OUTPUT, PRINT, or WRITE statement  
with a carriage return or carriage return and line feed. These  
End-Of-Line characters must be either accounted for (NRAM segment  
sized to accommodate them), or suppressed using an appropriate  
IMAGE or FORMAT statement. Some helpful methods:  
Control the End-Of-Line characters with format statements.  
Use the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format (see  
example) to send your data rather than the Indefinite Length  
Arbitrary Block Program Data format.  
A register address in A16 address space can be determined by:  
1FC0016 + (LADDR * 64) + register_number  
where 1FC00016 is the base address in the System Instrument A16 space,  
LADDR is the device logical address, 64 is the number of address bytes  
per device, and register_number is the register to which the data is  
written.  
If the device is an A24 device, the address can be determined using the  
VXI:CONF:DLISt command to find the base address in A24, and then  
adding the register_number to that value. A24 memory between address  
20000016 and address E0000016 is directly addressable by the Controller.  
Address may be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary  
(# B) formats. DOWNload is done by word (16 bit) access so address  
must be even.  
Related Commands: DIAG:UPLoad:SADDress?  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:DOWNload:CHECked :SADDress  
Byte Format Each byte sent with this command is expected to be in the following format:  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Control Bit  
Check Bits  
Data Bits  
Control Bit is used to indicate the serial driver information such as clear,  
reset, or end of transmission. This bit is ignored by the regular 488.2  
driver. The control bit should be one for regular data.  
Check Bits are used to detect and correct a single bit error. The control  
bit is not included in the check. The check bits are a Hamming single bit  
error correction code, as specified by the following table:  
Data Value  
Check Bits  
0
1
0
7
6
1
5
2
3
4
3
4
5
2
6
1
0
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Data bits are the actual data being transferred (four bits at a time). Each  
word to be written requires four data bytes for transmission. The  
significance of the data is dependant on the order received. The first data  
byte received contains the most significant nibble of the 16 bit word to be  
written (bits 15-12) . The next data byte received contains the least  
significant nibble of the most significant byte of the word (bits 11-8). The  
third data byte received contains the most significant nibble of the least  
significant byte of the word (bits 7-4). The fourth data byte received  
contains the least significant nibble of the least significant byte of the  
word to be written (bits 3-0). Once all four bytes have been received the  
word will be written.  
7-12 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :DOWNload [:MADDress]  
:DOWNload DIAGnostic:DOWNload[:MADDress] < address> ,< data> writes data into a  
non-volatile User RAM segment starting at address. The User RAM segment is  
allocated by the DIAG:NRAM:CREate command.  
[:MADDress]  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
data  
numeric  
0 to 16,777,215 (# HFFFFFE)  
none  
none  
arbitrary block  
program data  
See "Parameter Types", in the  
beginning of this chapter  
Comments  
CAUTION: Be certain that all of the data you download will be contained  
entirely within the allocated NRAM segment. Writing data outside of the  
NRAM segment will disrupt the operation of the Command Module.  
Most computers terminate an OUTPUT, PRINT, or WRITE statement  
with a carriage return or carriage return and line feed. These  
End-Of-Line characters must be either accounted for (NRAM segment  
sized to accommodate them), or suppressed using an appropriate  
IMAGE or FORMAT statement. Some helpful methods:  
Size the NRAM segment a little larger than the expected data block  
Control the End-Of-Line characters with format statements.  
Use the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format (see  
example) to send your data rather than the Indefinite Length  
Arbitrary Block Program Data format.  
This command is generally used to download data into User  
Configuration Tables. These tables allow the user to control the systems  
dynamic configuration DOWNload uses word writes.  
Address may be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary  
(# B) formats. DOWNload is done by word (16 bit) access so address  
must be even.  
Be certain that address specifies a location within the User RAM  
segment allocated using DIAG:NRAM:CREate if you are downloading a  
configuration table. DIAG:DOWNload can change the contents of  
System RAM causing unpredictable results.  
This command can also be used to write data to a device with registers in  
the A16 address space. See :DOWNload:SADDress.  
Related Commands: DIAG:NRAM:CREate, DIAG:NRAM:ADDRess?,  
DIAG:UPLoad?, VXI:CONF:CTABle, VXI:CONF:DCTable,  
VXI:CONF:ITABle, VXI:CONF:MTABle  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:DOWNload:SADDress  
Example Loading Dynamic Configuration information into an allocated RAM segment.  
DIAG:NRAM:CRE 6  
DIAG:BOOT:WARM  
Allocate a segment of user  
RAM  
Re-boot system to complete  
allocation  
DIAG:NRAM:ADDR?  
query startingaddress  
enter value to variable X  
get starting address into X  
DIAG:DOWN < value of X> ,table data download table data  
VXI:CONF:DCTAB < value of X>  
link configuration table to  
configuration algorithm  
DIAG:BOOT:WARM  
Re-boot to set new  
configuration  
:DOWNload:SADDress DIAGnostic:DOWNload:SADDress < address> ,< data> writes data to  
non-volatile User RAM at a single address specified by address, and writes data  
to devices with registers in A16 address space.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
data  
numeric  
0 to 16,777,215 (# HFFFFFE)  
none  
none  
arbitrary block  
program data  
See "Parameter Types", in the  
beginning of this chapter  
Comments  
Most computers terminate an OUTPUT, PRINT, or WRITE statement  
with a carriage return or carriage return and line feed. These  
End-Of-Line characters must be accounted for or suppressed using an  
appropriate IMAGE or FORMAT statement. Some helpful methods:  
Control the End-Of-Line characters with format statements.  
Use the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format to send  
your data rather than the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Program  
Data format.  
A register address in A16 address space can be determined by:  
1FC00016 + (LADDR * 64) + register_number  
where 1FC00016 is the base address in the System Instrument A16  
address space, LADDR is the device logical address, 64 is the number of  
address bytes per device, and register_number is the register to which the  
data is written.  
If the device is an A24 device, the address can be determined using the  
VXI:CONF:DLISt command to find the base address in A24, and then  
adding the register_number to that value. A24 memory between address  
20000016 and address E0000016 is directly addressable by the Controller.  
Address may be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary  
(# B) formats. DOWNload is done by word (16 bit) access so address  
must be even.  
Related Commands: DIAG:UPLoad:SADDress?  
7-14 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :DRAM:AVAilable?  
Example Downloading Data to a Single Address Location  
This program downloads an array with the data 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 to register 32 on a  
device with logical address 40 in VXIbus A16 address space.  
DIM Dnld_data(1:5)  
Dimension controller array  
DATA 1,2,3,4,5  
READ Dnld_data(*)  
Load data into controller array  
"DIAG:DOWN:SADD # H1FCA20,# 210";  
This line is sent without termination.  
Send Dnld_data as 16-bit words  
Terminate after last word with  
EOI or LF and EOI  
:DRAM:AVAilable? DIAGnostic:DRAM:AVAilable? Returns the amount of RAM remaining  
(available) in the DRAM (Driver RAM) segment, which is the amount of RAM  
in the segment minus any previously loaded drivers.  
Comments  
DIAG:DRAM:CREAte does not allocate the RAM segment until after a  
subsequent re-boot.  
Related Commands: DIAG:DRAM:CREate, DIAG:DRIVer:LOAD,  
DIAG:DRIVer:LIST?  
Example Determine amount of space left for drivers in the DRAm segment.  
DIAG:DRAM:AVA?  
enter statement  
statement returns available  
DRAM in bytes.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:DRAM:CREate  
:DRAM:CREate DIAGnostic:DRAM:CREate < size> < num_drivers> creates a non-volatile  
RAM area for loading instrument drivers. DIAGnostic:DRAM:CREate 0  
removes the RAM segment when the system is re-booted.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
size  
numeric  
0 to available RAM or  
MIN| MAX  
none  
num_drivers  
numeric  
0 to available RAM or  
MIN| MAX| DEF  
8
Comments  
size is the number of bytes to be allocated to DRAM use. A size of zero  
will remove the DRAM segment.  
num_drivers is the maximum number of drivers to be loaded.  
The DRAM segment will be created only after the System Instrument has  
been re-booted (cycle power or execute DIAG:BOOT).  
Based on the size specified, DIAG:DRAM:CRE rounds the size up to an  
even value.  
DRAM will de-allocate previously allocated NRAM and RDISk  
segments.  
Using all of the available RAM (MAX) for the DRAM segment will limit  
some functions such as IBASIC program space, instrument reading  
storage space, and full functionality of the Display Terminal Interface.  
Use DIAG:DRIVer:LOAD... and, DIAG:DRIVer:LIST...? to load and  
manage DRAM.  
Related Commands:DIAG:DRAM:AVAilable?,  
DIAG:DRIVer:LOAD..., DIALG:DRIVer:LIST...?.  
Example Allocate a 15 Kbyte non-volatile Driver Ram segment.  
DIAG:DRAM:CREate 15360 allocate 15 Kbyte segment of  
Driver Ram.  
:DRAM:CREate? DIAGnostic:DRAM:CREate? [< MIN| MAX> ,< MIN| MAX| DEF> ] returns  
the size (in bytes) of a previously created non-volatile RAM area for loading  
instrument drivers, and the number of drivers currently loaded.  
size is the number of bytes currently allocated to DRAM use.  
num_drivers is the number of drivers currently loaded.  
7-16 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :DRIVer:LOAD < driver_block>  
:DRIVer:LOAD DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LOAD < driver_block> loads the instrument driver  
contained in the driver_block into a previously created DRAM segment.  
< driver_block>  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
driver_block  
arbitrary block  
program data  
See "Parameter Types"at the  
beginning of this chapter.  
none  
Comments  
driver_block is the actual binary driver data to be transferred.  
Related Commands:DIAG:DRAM:AVAilable?,  
DIAG:DRAM:CREate, DIAG:DRIVer:LIST...?.  
Example Download a driver block.  
DIAG:DRIV:LOAD  
downloads the driver < driver_block> to DRAM memory.  
:DRIVer :LOAD: DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LOAD:CHECked < driver_block> loads the instrument  
driver contained in the driver_block into a previously created DRAM segment.  
The driver_block is formatted in the same data byte format used by  
DOWNload:CHECked.  
CHECked  
< driver_block>  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
driver_block  
arbitrary block  
program data  
See "Parameter Types"at the  
beginning of this chapter.  
none  
driver_block is the actual binary driver data to be transferred.  
This is the only way to download a device driver over a serial (RS232C)  
line.  
Related Commands:DIAG:DRAM:AVAilable?,  
DIAG:DRAM:CREate, DIAG:DRIVer:LIST...?.  
Example Download the driver named DIGITAL.DC.  
DIAG:DRIVer:LOAD:CHEC  
downloads the driver < driver_block> to DRAM memory.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:DRIVer :LIST[:type]?  
:DRIVer :LIST[:type]? DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LIST[:type]? lists all drivers from the specified table found  
on the system. If no parameter is specified, all driver tables are searched and the  
data from each driver table is separated from the others by a semicolon.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
type  
discrete  
ALL| RAM| ROM  
ALL  
For each driver listed, the following items are returned:  
NAME, IDN_MODEL, REV_CODE, TABLE  
Parameter  
Description  
The instrument name. This is the same label that  
NAME  
appears on the instrument selection menu.  
IDN_MODEL  
REV_CODE  
TABLE  
The model name. This is the same model name as  
used in the response to the *IDN? command.  
The revision code. It is in the form A.nn.nn where A  
as an alpha character  
The name of the table the driver was found in.  
This will be RAM or ROM.  
Comments  
DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LIST? lists all drivers found in the system.  
DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LIST:RAM? lists all drivers found in the RAM  
driver table DRAM.  
DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LIST:ROM? lists all drivers found in the ROM  
driver table.  
Related Commands:DIAG:DRAM:AVAilable?,  
DIAG:DRAM:CREate, DIAG:DRIVer:LOAD...  
Example List all drivers in the system.  
DIAG:DRIV:LIST?  
lists all drivers currently loaded.  
Example List all drivers in ROM.  
DIAG:DRIV:LIST:ROM?  
lists all of the drivers currently  
loaded in ROM.  
7-18 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :INTerrupt:ACTivate  
:INTerrupt:ACTivate DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:ACTivate < mode> enables an interrupt on the VXI  
backplane interrupt line specified by DIAG:INT:SET[n] to be acknowledged.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
mode  
boolean  
0| 1| OFF| ON  
none  
Comments  
When an interrupt occurs and has been acknowledged, the response is  
read with the DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:RESPonse? command.  
If an interrupt occurs on a VXIbus backplane interrupt line and the  
interrupt acknowledgement has not been enabled, there is no interrupt  
acknowledgement response. The interrupt will be held off until the  
interrupt acknowledge is enabled by either the DIAG:INT:ACT  
command or DIAG:INT:RESP? command.  
ON or 1 enable interrupt acknowledgement. OFF or 0 disables interrupt  
acknowledgement.  
Bit 8 in the Operation Status register can be used to indicate when an  
interrupt has been acknowledged. See chapter 6 for more details about  
this register.  
Interrupt acknowledgement must be re-enabled every time an interrupt is  
acknowledged  
Related Commands: DIAG:INT:PRIority[n], DIAG:INT:RESP?,  
DIAG:INT:SET[n]  
*RST Condition: DIAG:INT:ACTivate OFF (for all lines)  
Example Enable an Interrupt Acknowledgement on Line 2.  
DIAG:INT:SET2  
Set up interrupt line 2  
DIAG:INT:ACT ON  
Enable interrupt to be  
acknowledged  
:INTerrupt:SETup[n] DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:SETup[n] < mode> specifies that an interrupt on VXI  
backplane interrupt line [n] will be serviced by the System Instrument service  
routine (DIAGnostic:INTerrupt commands) rather than the operating system  
service routine.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
mode  
boolean  
0| 1| OFF| ON  
none  
Comments  
SETup1 through SETup7 specify the VXI interrupt lines 1 through 7.  
Sending SETup without an [n] value specifies VXI interrupt line 1.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:SETup[n]?  
ON or 1 specify that interrupt handling is to be set up for the specified  
interrupt line. OFF or 0 indicate that interrupt handling of the specified  
line is to be done by the operating system.  
Related Commands: DIAG:INT:ACT, DIAG:INT:PRIority[n],  
DIAG:INT:RESP?  
*RST Condition: DIAG:INT:SETup[n] OFF (for all lines)  
Example Setup and wait for VXI interrupt response on line 2.  
DIAG:INT:PRI2 5  
set priority to 5 on line 2  
DIAG:INT:SETUP2 ON  
handle interrupt on line 2  
code which will  
.
.
initiate an action  
.
resulting in an interrupt  
Read the acknowledge response  
DIAG:INT:RESP?  
:INTerrupt:SETup[n]? DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:SETup[n]? Returns the current state set by  
DIAG:INT:SETUP[n] < mode> , for the VXI interrupt line specified by [n] in  
SETup[n]?.  
Comments  
SETup1? through SETup7? specify the VXI interrupt lines 1  
through 7.  
Sending SETup? without an [n] value specifies VXI interrupt line 1.  
If 1 is returned, interrupt handling is set up for the specified interrupt  
line using the System Instrument (DIAGnostic:INTerrupt commands). If  
0 is returned, interrupt handling is done by the operating system.  
Related Commands: DIAG:INT:SETup[n], DIAG:INT:PRIority[n],  
DIAG:INT:ACT, DIAG:INT:RESP?  
Example Determine interrupt setup for line 4.  
DIAG:INT:SETUP4?  
enter statement  
statement returns 0 or 1  
7-20 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :INTerrupt:PRIority[n]  
:INTerrupt:PRIority[n] DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:PRIority[n] [< level> ] gives a priority level to the VXI  
interrupt line specified by [n] in PRIority[n].  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
level  
numeric  
1 through 7| MIN| MAX| DEF  
none  
Comments  
The priority of an interrupt line determines which line will be  
acknowledged first in the event that more than one line is interrupting.  
For level, lower values have lower priority (level 1 is lower priority than  
level 2).  
No parameter, or DEF (default) sets priority to 1.  
PRIority1 through PRIority7 specify the VXI interrupt lines 1  
through 7.  
Sending PRIority without an [n] value specifies VXI interrupt line 1.  
This command has no effect if only one interrupt is to be set up.  
Related Commands: DIAG:INT:ACT, DIAG:INT:SETup[n],  
DIAG:INT:RESP?  
Example Setup, set a priority, and wait for VXI interrupt response on line 2.  
DIAG:INT:PRI2 5  
handle interrupt on line 2  
DIAG:INT:PRI2 5  
set priority to 5 on line 2  
code which will  
.
.
initiate an action  
.
resulting in an interrupt  
Read the acknowledge response  
DIAG:INT:RESP?  
:INTerrupt:PRIority[n]? DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:PRIority[n]? Returns the current priority level set for  
the VXI interrupt line specified by [n] in PRIority[n]?.  
Comments  
PRIority?1 through PRIority?7 specify the VXI interrupt lines 1  
through 7.  
Sending PRIority? without an [n] value specifies VXI interrupt line 1.  
Related Commands: DIAG:INT:PRIority[n], DIAG:INT:SETup[n],  
DIAG:INT:RESP?  
Example Determine interrupt priority for line 4.  
DIAG:INT:PRI4?  
enter statement  
statement returns 1 through 7  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:RESPonse?  
:INTerrupt:RESPonse? DIAGnostic:INTerrupt:RESPonse? Returns the interrupt acknowledge  
response (STATUS/ID word) from the highest priority VXI interrupt line.  
Comments  
The value returned is the response from the interrupt acknowledge cycle  
(STATUS/ID word) of a device interrupting on one of the interrupt lines  
set up with the DIAG:INT:SET[n] command.  
Bits 0 through 7 of the STATUS/ID word are the interrupting device’s  
logical address. Bits 8 through 15 are Cause/Status bits. Bits 16 through  
31 (D32 Extension) are not read by the System Instrument.  
If only bits 0 through 7 are used by the device (bits 8 - 15 are FF), the  
logical address can be determined by adding 256 to the value returned by  
DIAG:INT:RESP?. If bits 0 - 15 are used, the logical address address is  
determined by adding 65536 to the value returned (if the number  
returned is negative.  
Only the interrupt lines previously configured with the  
DIAG:INT:SET[n] commands generate responses for this command.  
If there are interrupts on multiple lines when this command is received,  
or when the acknowledgement was enabled with DIAG:INT:ACT, the  
response data returned will be from the line with the highest priority set  
using the DIAG:INT:PRI [n] command.  
If interrupt acknowledge has not been enabled with DIAG:INT:ACT,  
then it will be enabled by DIAG:INT:RESP?. System Instrument  
execution is halted until the interrupt acknowledgement response is  
received.  
DIAG:INT:WAIT? can also be used to wait for the interrupt response.  
Related Commands: DIAG:INT:ACT, DIAG:INT:SETup[n],  
DIAG:INT:PRIority[n]  
Example Setup and wait for VXI interrupt response on line 2.  
DIAG:INT:PRI2 5  
set priority to 5 on line 2  
DIAG:INT:SETUP2 ON  
handle interrupt on line 2  
code which will  
.
.
initiate an action  
.
resulting in an interrupt  
read the acknowledge response  
DIAG:INT:RESP?  
7-22 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :NRAM:ADDRess?  
:NRAM:ADDRess? DIAGnostic:NRAM:ADDRess? Returns the starting address of the non-volatile  
User RAM segment allocated using DIAG:NRAM:CREate.  
Comments  
DIAG:NRAM:CREAte does not allocate the RAM segment until after a  
subsequent re-boot. To get accurate results, execute  
DIAG:NRAM:ADDRess? after the re-boot.  
Related Commands: DIAG:NRAM:CREate, DIAG:NRAM:CREate?,  
DIAG:DOWNload, DIAG:UPload?  
Example Determine address of the most recently created User RAM segment  
DIAG:NRAM:ADDR?  
enter statement  
statement returns decimal  
numeric address  
:NRAM:CREate DIAGnostic:NRAM:CREate < size> allocates a segment of non-volatile User  
RAM for a user-defined table.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
size  
numeric  
0 to available RAM or  
MIN| MAX  
none  
Comments  
The RAM segment will be created only after the System Instrument has  
been re-booted (cycle power or execute DIAG:BOOT).  
Based on the size specified, DIAG:NRAM:CRE rounds the size up to an  
even value.  
NRAM will de-allocate a previously allocated RDISk segment.  
Using all of the available RAM (MAX) for the NRAM segment will limit  
some functions such as IBASIC program space, instrument reading  
storage space, and full functionality of the Display Terminal Interface.  
Use DIAG:NRAM:ADDR? to determine the starting address of the  
RAM segment.  
Use DIAG:DOWNload, DIAG:UPLoad?, DIAG:PEEK, or  
DIAG:POKE to store and retrieve information in the non-volatile RAM  
segment.  
Use DIAG:NRAM:CRE? MAX to find maximum available segment size.  
Related Commands: DIAG:NRAM:CREate?,  
DIAG:NRAM:ADDRess?, DIAG:DOWNload, DIAG:UPLoad?  
Example Allocate a 15 Kbyte User Non-volatile Ram segment.  
DIAG:NRAM:CREate 15360 allocate 15 Kbyte segment of  
User Ram.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:NRAM:CREate?  
:NRAM:CREate? DIAGnostic:NRAM:CREate? [MIN | MAX] Returns the current or allowable  
(MIN | MAX) size of the User non-volatile RAM segment.  
Comments  
DIAG:NRAM:CRE does not allocate driver RAM until a subsequent  
re-boot. To get accurate results, execute DIAG:NRAM:CRE? after the  
re-boot.  
Related Commands: DIAG:NRAM:ADDRess?, DIAG:NRAM:CREate  
Example Check the size of the User RAM segment.  
DIAG:NRAM:CREate?  
enter statement  
statement enters size in bytes  
:PEEK? DIAGnostic:PEEK? < address> ,< width> reads the data (number of bits  
given by width) starting at address.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
width  
numeric  
numeric  
0 to 16,777,215 (# HFFFFFF)  
8| 16| 32  
none  
none  
Comments  
Address specifies a location within the range of the control processors  
addressing capability.  
Address may be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary  
(# B) formats.  
Related Commands: DIAG:POKE  
Example Read byte from User non-volatile RAM  
DIAG:PEEK? 16252928,8  
ask for byte  
enter statement  
return value of byte  
7-24 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :POKE  
:POKE DIAGnostic:POKE < address> ,< width> ,< data> writes data (number of  
bits given by width) starting at address.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
width  
data  
numeric  
numeric  
numeric  
0 to 16,777,215 (# HFFFFFF)  
8| 16| 32  
none  
none  
none  
8 to 32 bit integer  
Comments  
Address specifies a location within the range of the control processors  
addressing capability.  
Address and data may be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or  
binary (# B) formats.  
CAUTION: DIAG:POKE can change the contents of any address in  
RAM. Changing the contents of RAM used by the Command Modules  
control processor can cause unpredictable results.  
Related Commands: DIAG:PEEK?  
Example Store byte in User non-volatile RAM  
DIAG:POKE 16252928,8,255  
:RDISk:ADDress? DIAGnostic:RDISk:ADDress? Returns the starting address of the RAM disc  
volume previously defined with the DIAG:RDISk:CREate command. The RAM  
disc volume is defined for use only by the IBASIC option.  
Comments  
DIAG:RDISk:CREAte does not allocate the RAM volume segment until  
after a subsequent re-boot. To get accurate results, execute  
DIAG:RDISk:ADDRess? after the re-boot.  
Related Commands: DIAG:RDISk:CREate, DIAG:RDISk:CREate?  
Example Return the starting address of the IBASIC RAM volume.  
DIAG:RDIS:ADDR?  
enter statement  
statement returns decimal  
numeric address  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:RDISk:CREate  
:RDISk:CREate DIAGnostic:RDISk:CREate < size> Allocates memory for a RAM disc volume.  
The RAM disc volume is defined for use only by the IBASIC option.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
size  
numeric  
0 to available RAM or  
MIN| MAX  
none  
Comments  
The RAM disc segment will only be created after the System Instrument  
has been re-booted (cycle power or execute DIAG:BOOT).  
Based on the size specified, DIAG:RDIS:CRE rounds the size up to an  
even value.  
Using all of the available RAM (MAX) for the disc volume segment will  
limit some functions such as IBASIC program space, instrument reading  
storage space, and full functionality of the Display Terminal Interface.  
Related Commands: DIAG:RDISk:ADDress?, DIAG:RDISk:CREate?  
Example Allocate a 64 Kbyte segment for the IBASIC option’s RAM volume.  
DIAG:RDIS:CRE 65536  
:RDISk:CREate? DIAGnostic:RDISk:CREate? [MIN | MAX] Returns the current or allowable  
(MIN | MAX) size of the RAM disc volume segment.  
Comments  
DIAG:RDIS:CRE does not allocate driver RAM until a subsequent  
re-boot. To get accurate results, execute DIAG:RDIS:CRE? after the  
re-boot.  
Related Commands: DIAG:RDISk:CREate, DIAG:RDISk:ADDR?  
Example Return the size of the current RAM disc volume.  
DIAG:RDIS:CRE?  
enter statement  
returns numeric size  
7-26 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic :UPLoad[:MADDress]?  
:UPLoad[:MADDress]? DIAGnostic:UPLoad[:MADDress]? < address> ,< byte_count> Returns the  
number of bytes specified by byte_count, starting at address.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
numeric  
numeric  
0 to 16,777,215 (# HFFFFFE)  
0 to (999,999,998)  
none  
none  
byte_count  
Comments  
Address may be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary  
(# B) formats.  
UPLoad is done by word (16 bit) access so address and byte_count must  
be even.  
Data is returned in the Definite Block Response Data format:  
# < non-zero digit> < digit(s)> < data byte(s)>  
Where the value of < non-zero digit> equals the number of < digit(s)> .  
The value of < digit(s)> taken as a decimal integer indicates the number  
of < data byte(s)> to expect in the block.  
This command can also be used to retrieve data from a device with  
registers in A16 address space. See DIAG:UPload:SADDress?  
Related Commands: DIAG:NRAM:ADDress?, DIAG:NRAM:CREate,  
DIAG:DOWNload  
Example Upload data stored on non-volatile User RAM.  
DIM HEADER$[6],DATA(1024)  
6 chars for "# 41024" header  
1024 chars for data bytes  
DIAG:NRAM:ADDR?  
get starting address of NRAM  
enter ADD  
address into ADD  
OUTPUT "DIAG:UPL? < value of ADD> ,1024"  
request 1 Kbyte from address in ADD  
enter HEADER$  
strip "# 41024" from data  
enter DATA  
get 1024 data bytes into string; use enter format so statement  
wont terminate on CRs or LFs etc. Line Feed (LF) and EOI  
follow the last character retrieved.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGnostic:UPload:SADDress?  
:UPload:SADDress? DIAGnostic:UPLoad:SADDress? < address> ,< byte_count> Returns the  
number of bytes specified by byte_count, at address.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
numeric  
numeric  
0 to 16,777,215 (# HFFFFFE)  
0 to (999,999,998)  
none  
none  
byte_count  
Comments  
Address may be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary  
(# B) formats.  
UPLoad is done by word (16 bit) access so address and byte_count must  
be even.  
The register address in A16 address space can be determined by:  
1FC00016 + (LADDR * 64) + register_number  
where 1FC00016 is the base address in the VXIbus A16 address space,  
LADDR is the device logical address, 64 is the number of address bytes  
per device,  
retrieved.  
and register_number is the register from which data is  
If the device is an A24 device, the address can be determined using the  
VXI:CONF:DLISt command to find the base address in A24, and then  
adding the register_number to that value. A24 memory between address  
200000016 and address E0000016 is directly accessible by the Controller.  
Data is returned in the Definite Block Response Data format:  
# < non-zero digit> < digit(s)> < data byte(s)>  
Where the value of < non-zero digit> equals the number of < digit(s)> .  
The value of < digit(s)> taken as a decimal integer indicates the number  
of < data byte(s)> to expect in the block.  
Related Commands: DIAG:DOWNload:SADDress  
Example Upload data stored in non-volatile User RAM.  
This program reads 1024 data bytes from register 32 on a device with logical  
address 40 in Command Module A16 address space.  
DIM HEADER$[6],DATA(1024)  
6 chars for "# 41024" header  
1024 chars for data bytes  
OUTPUT "DIAG:UPL:SADD? # H1FCA20,1024"  
request 1 Kbyte from device  
register 32  
enter HEADER$  
strip "# 41024" from data  
enter DATA  
get 1024 data bytes into string; use enter format so statement  
wont terminate on CRs or LFs etc. Line Feed (LF) and EOI  
follow the last character retrieved.  
7-28 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INITiate [:IMMediate]  
INITiate  
The INITiate command subsystem controls the initiation of the trigger system  
for one or more trigger cycles. INITiate enables while ABORt disables the  
trigger system. The TRIGger command subsystem controls the behavior of the  
trigger system while it is enabled.  
Subsystem Syntax INITiate  
[:IMMediate]  
[:IMMediate] INITiate:IMMediate changes the trigger system from the Idle state to the Wait  
For Trigger state.  
Comments  
If TRIGger:SOURce is IMMediate, the Pacer starts. If TRIG:SOURce is  
BUS, EXT, or HOLD, the Pacer will start when that trigger condition is  
satisfied.  
Sending the ABORt command will reset the trigger system back to its  
Idle state and terminate any pacer pulse train in progress.  
Sending INIT while the system is still in the Wait for Trigger state  
(already INITiated) will cause an error -213,"Init ignored".  
Related Commands: ABORt, TRIGger  
*RST Condition: Trigger system is in the Idle state.  
Example Initiating the trigger system (Wait For Trigger state).  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD  
trigger source is TRIG  
command  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 1E3  
output 1000 Pacer pulses  
pulse period set to .1 second  
go to Wait For Trigger state  
SOUR:PULS:PER .1 S  
INIT  
TRIG  
trigger the Pacer to output  
pulses  
.
.
INIT  
must re-initiate system before  
each trigger cycle  
TRIG  
.
.
System Instrument Command Reference 7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[SOURce]:PULSe:COUNt  
[SOURce]  
The System Instrument contains a Pacer which produces TTL level pulses. The  
SOURCE command subsystem controls the number and period of these pulses.  
The output of the Pacer is available at the rear-panel BNC connector labeled  
“Pacer Out”.  
Subsystem Syntax [SOURce]  
:PULSe  
:COUNt < count>  
:COUNt? [MIN | MAX]  
:PERiod < period>  
:PERiod? [MIN | MAX]  
:PULSe:COUNt SOURce:PULSe:COUNt < count> sets the number of Pacer pulses that are  
generated when the trigger condition is satisfied.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
count  
numeric  
1 to 8,388,607| 9.9E37|  
INFinity| MIN| MAX  
none  
Comments  
When count is set to INFinity or 9.9E37, pulses are continuous.  
Related Commands: ABORT, INIT, TRIG  
*RST Condition: SOUR:COUN 1  
Example Setting the Pacer pulse count.  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD  
trigger source is TRIG  
command  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 1E3  
output 1000 Pacer pulses  
pulse period set to .1 second  
go to Wait For Trigger state  
SOUR:PULS:PER .1 S  
INIT  
TRIG  
trigger the Pacer to output  
pulses  
:PULSe:COUNt? SOURce:PULSe:COUNt? [MIN | MAX] returns:  
The current count if no parameter is sent.  
The maximum allowable count if MAX is sent.  
The minimum allowable count if MIN is sent.  
Example Querying the pulse count.  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 1E3  
output 1000 Pacer pulses  
SOUR:PULS:COUN?  
query system for pulse count  
retrieve value  
7-30 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[SOURce] :PULSe:PERiod  
:PULSe:PERiod SOURce:PULSe:PERiod < period> sets the period of the pulse(s) to be  
generated by the Pacer.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
Type  
pweiod  
numeric  
500E-9 to 8.388607 or  
MIN| MAX  
second  
Comments  
The resolution of period is 500E-9 seconds.  
The Pacer waveform is a square wave with the output high for the first  
half of the period, and low for the final half.  
Related Commands: SOUR:PULS:COUN, ABORT, INIT,TRIG  
*RST Condition: SOUR:PULS:PER 1E-6  
Example Setting the Pacer pulse period.  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD  
trigger source is TRIG  
command  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 1E3  
output 1000 Pacer pulses  
pulse period set to .1 second  
go to Wait For Trigger state  
SOUR:PULS:PER .1 S  
INIT  
TRIG  
trigger the Pacer to output  
pulses  
:PULSe:PERiod? SOURce:PULSe:PERiod? [MIN | MAX] returns :  
The current period if no parameter is sent.  
The maximum allowable period if MAX is sent.  
The minimum allowable period if MIN is sent.  
Example Querying the Pacer pulse period.  
SOUR:PULS:PER?  
ask for pulse period  
enter statement  
statement to enter value of  
period  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STATus :OPERation :CONDition?  
STATus  
The STATus subsystem commands access the condition, event, and enable  
registers in the Operation Status group and the Questionable Data group.  
Subsystem Syntax STATus  
:OPERation  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle < event>  
:ENABle?  
[:EVENt]?  
:PRESet  
:QUEStionable  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle < event>  
:ENABle?  
[:EVENt]?  
:OPERation STATus:OPER:COND? returns the state of the condition register in the  
Operation Status group. The state represents conditions which are part of an  
instruments operation.  
:CONDition?  
Comments  
Bit 8 in the register is used by the System Instrument (Command  
Module) to indicate when an interrupt set up by the DIAG:INTerrupt  
commands has been acknowledged.  
Reading the condition register does not change the setting of bit 8. Bit 8  
is cleared by the DIAG:INT:RESP? command.  
Related Commands: STAT:OPER:ENABle, STAT:OPER:EVENt?  
Example Reading the contents of the condition register  
STAT:OPER:COND?  
enter statement  
query register  
:OPERation:ENABle STATus:OPER:ENABle < event> sets an enable mask to allow events  
monitored by the condition register and recorded in the event register, to send a  
summary bit to the Status Byte register (bit 7).  
< event>  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
event  
numeric  
256  
none  
Bit 8 in the condition register is used by the system instrument  
(Command Module) to indicate when an interrupt set up by the  
DIAG:INTerrupt commands has been acknowledged.  
7-32 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STATus :OPERation:ENABle?  
Bit 8 is the only bit used in the condition register (by the System  
Instrument), therefore, it is the only bit which needs to be unmasked in  
the event register. Specifying the "bit weight"for the event unmasks the  
bit. The bit weight is 256 and can be specified in decimal, hexadecimal  
(# H), Octal (# Q) or binary (# B).  
When the summary bit is sent, it sets bit 7 in the Status Byte register.  
Related Commands: STAT:OPER:ENABle?  
Example Unmasking bit 8 in the Event Register  
STAT:OPER:ENAB 256  
unmask bit 8  
:OPERation:ENABle? STATus:OPER:ENABle? returns which bits in the event register (standard  
operation status group) are unmasked.  
Comments  
Bit 8 in the condition register is used by the system instrument  
(Command Module) to indicate when an interrupt set up by the  
DIAG:INTerrupt commands has been acknowledged.  
Bit 8 in the event register generally is the only bit which will be unmasked.  
If this bit is unmasked when STAT:OPER:ENAB? is sent, 256 is  
returned.  
Reading the event register mask does not change the mask setting  
(STAT:OPER:ENAB < event> ).  
Related Commands: STAT:OPER:ENABle  
Example Reading the Event Register Mask  
STAT:OPER:ENAB?  
enter statement  
query register mask  
:OPERation[:EVENt]? STATus:OPER:EVENt? returns which bits in the event register (standard  
operation status group) are set. The event register indicates when there has  
been a positive transition in the condition register.  
Comments  
Bit 8 in the condition register is used by the system instrument  
(Command Module) to indicate when an interrupt set up by the  
DIAG:INTerrupt commands has been acknowledged.  
Bit 8 in the event register generally is the only bit which is used. If this bit  
is set when STAT:OPER:EVEN? is sent, 256 is returned.  
Reading the event register clears the contents of the register. If the event  
register is to be used to generate a service request (SRQ), you should  
clear the register before enabling the SRQ (*SRE). This prevents an  
SRQ from occurring due to a previous event.  
Related Commands: STAT:OPER:ENABle, STAT:OPER:ENABle?  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STATus :PRESet  
Example Reading the Event Register  
STAT:OPER:EVEN?  
enter statement  
query if bit(s) is set  
:PRESet STATus:PRESet sets each bit in the enable register (standard operation status  
group) to 0’.  
Example Presetting the Enable Register  
STAT:PRES  
preset enable register  
:QUESTionable The STATus:QUEStionable commands are supported by the system instrument,  
however, they are not used by the System Instrument. Queries of the  
Questionable Data condition and event registers will always return + 0.  
7-34 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem :BEEPer[:IMMediate]  
SYSTem  
The SYSTEM command subsystem for the System Instrument provides for:  
Configuration of the RS-232 interface  
Control and access of the System Instruments real time clock/calendar  
(SYST:TIME, SYST:TIME?, SYST:DATE, SYST:DATE?).  
Access to the System Instruments error queue (SYST:ERR?).  
Configuring the communication ports (GPIB and serial).  
Subsystem Syntax  
SYSTem  
:BEEPer  
[:IMMediate]  
:COMMunicate  
:GPIB  
:ADDRess < address> | MIN| MAX  
:ADDRess? [MIN| MAX]  
:SERial[n]  
:CONTrol  
:DTR ON | OFF | STANdard | IBFull  
:DTR?  
:RTS ON | OFF | STANdard | IBFull  
:RTS?  
[:RECeive]  
:BAUD < baud_rate> | MIN | MAX  
:BAUD? [MIN | MAX]  
:BITS 7 | 8 | MIN | MAX  
:BITS? [MIN | MAX]  
:PACE  
[:PROTocol] XON | NONE  
[:PROTocol]?  
:THReshold  
:STARt < characters> | MIN | MAX  
:STARt? [MIN | MAX]  
:STOP < characters> | MIN | MAX  
:STOP? [MIN | MAX]  
:PARity  
:CHECk 1 | 0 | ON | OFF  
:CHECk?  
[:TYPE] EVEN | ODD | ZERO | ONE | NONE  
[:TYPE]?  
:SBITs 1 | 2 | MIN | MAX  
:SBITs? [MIN | MAX]  
:TRANsmit  
:AUTO 1 | 0 | ON | OFF  
:AUTO?  
:PACE  
[:PROTocol] XON | NONE  
[:PROTocol]?  
:DATE < year> ,< month> ,< day>  
:DATE? [MIN| MAX,MIN| MAX,MIN| MAX]  
:ERRor?  
:TIME < hour> ,< minute> ,< second>  
:TIME? [MIN | MAX,MIN | MAX,MIN | MAX]  
:VERSion?  
:BEEPer[:IMMediate] SYSTem:BEEPer:IMMediate causes the system beeper to sound momentarily.  
Example Sound the Beeper  
SYST:BEEP:IMM  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem:COMMunicate :GPIB:ADDRess  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess < address> sets the primary address  
of the Instruments GPIB port.  
:GPIB:ADDRess  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
address  
numeric  
must round to 0 to 30  
none  
Comments  
The value of < address> is effective after the System Instrument has  
received a < new line> following the SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR  
command. < new line> can be a line-feed or END (EOI signal).  
Related Commands: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR?,  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD  
*RST Condition: *RST does not change the System Instruments primary  
GPIB address.  
Example Set the GPIB port’s primary address  
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 9  
sets the primary address to 9  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess? returns the Command Module  
primary GPIB address.  
:GPIB:ADDRess?  
Example Read the Primary GPIB Address.  
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR?  
Read the GPIB address  
Enter the GPIB address  
enter statement  
:COMMunicate The SYStem:COMMunicate:SERial[n]: commands set and/or modify the  
configuration of the serial interface(s) that are under control of the System  
:SERial[n]:  
Instrument. The interface to be affected by the command is specified by a  
number (zero through seven) which replaces the [n] in the :SERial[n]  
command. The number is the interfaces card number. Card number zero  
specifies the E1300/E1301 mainframes built-in interface while one through  
seven specify one of up to seven E1324 B-size plug-in serial interface modules.  
The serial interface installed at logical address 1 becomes card number 1, the  
serial interface installed at the next sequential logical address becomes card  
number 2 and so on. The logical addresses used by plug-in serial interfaces must  
start at 1 and be contiguous (no unused logical addresses).  
Comments  
Serial communication commands take effect after the end of the program  
message containing the command.  
Serial communication settings for the built-in RS-232 interface can be  
stored in its non-volatile RAM only after the  
DIAG:COMM:SER[n]:STORe command is executed. These settings are  
used at power-up and DIAG:BOOT[:WARM].  
7-36 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem :COMMunicate :SERial[n] :CONTrol :DTR  
Serial communication settings for the Agilent E1324A Datacomm  
interface can be stored in its on-board non-volatile EEROM only after  
the DIAG:COMM:SER[n]:STORe command is executed. These settings  
are used at power-up and DIAG:BOOT[:WARM].  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set the serial communication parameters to the  
following defaults:  
BAUD 9600  
BITS 8  
PARity NONE  
SBITs 1  
DTR ON  
RTS ON  
PACE XON  
Example Setting baud rate for plug-in card 2.  
SYST:COMM:SER2:BAUD 9600  
(must be a card number 1 also)  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[ n] :CONTrol:DTR < dtr_cntrl> controls the  
behavior of the Data Terminal Ready output line. DTR can be set to a static  
state (ON | OFF), can operate as a modem control line (STANDard), or can be  
used as a hardware handshake line (IBFull).  
:SERial[n] :CONTrol  
:DTR  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
dtr_cntrl  
discrete  
ON| OFF| STANDard| IBFull  
none  
Comments  
The following table defines each value of dtr_cntrl:  
Value Definition  
ON  
DTR line is asserted  
DTR Line is unasserted  
OFF  
STANdard  
DTR will be asserted when the serial interface is  
ready to send output data. Data will be sent if the  
connected device asserts DSR and CTS.  
IBFull  
While the input buffer is not yet at the :STOP  
threshold, DTR is asserted. When the input buffer  
reaches the :STOP threshold, DTR will be  
unasserted.  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set DTR to ON.  
Related Commands: SYST:COMM:SER[n]:CONT:RTS,  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PACE:THR:STARt,  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PACE:THR:STOP  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Asserting the DTR line.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:CONT:DTR ON  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem:COMMunicate :SERial[n] :CONTrol :DTR?  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[ n] :CONTrol:DTR? returns the current setting  
for DTR line control.  
:SERial[n] :CONTrol  
:DTR?  
Example Checking the setting of DTR control.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:CONT:DTR?  
enter statement  
statement enters the string  
"O N ", "O FF", "S T A N ", or "IBF"  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[ n] :CONTrol:RTS < Rts_cntrl> controls the  
behavior of the Request To Send output line. RTS can be set to a static state  
(ON | OFF), can operate as a modem control line (STANDard), or can be used  
as a hardware handshake line (IBFull).  
:SERial[n] :CONTrol  
:RTS  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
rts_cntrl  
discrete  
ON| OFF| STANdard| IBFull  
none  
Comments  
The following table defines each value of rts_cntrl:  
Value Definition  
ON  
RTS line is asserted  
RTS Line is unasserted  
OFF  
STANdard  
RTS will be asserted when the serial interface is  
ready to send output data. Data will be sent if the  
connected device asserts CTS and DSR.  
IBFull  
While the input buffer is not yet at the :STOP  
threshold, RTS is asserted. When the input buffer  
reaches the :STOP threshold, RTS will be  
unasserted.  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set RTS to ON.  
Related Commands: SYST:COMM:SER[n]:CONT:DTR,  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PACE:THR:STARt,  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PACE:THR:STOP  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Unasserting the RTS line.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:CONT:RTS OFF  
7-38 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem :COMMunicate :SERial[n] :CONTrol :RTS?  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[ n] :CONTrol:RTS? returns the current setting  
for RTS line control.  
:SERial[n] :CONTrol  
:RTS?  
Example Checking the setting of RTS control.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:CONT:RTS?  
enter statement  
statement enters the string  
"O N ", "O FF", "S T A N ", or "IBF"  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:BAUD < baud_rate> Sets the  
baud rate for the serial port.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:BAUD  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
baud  
numeric  
300 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 |  
none  
9600 | 19200 | MIN | MAX  
Comments  
Attempting to set baud to other than those values shown will result in an  
error -222.  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set BAUD to 9600.  
*RST condition: No change.  
Example Setting the baud rate to 1200.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:BAUD 1200  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:BAUD? [MIN | MAX] returns:  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:BAUD?  
The current baud rate setting if no parameter is sent.  
The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent.  
The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent.  
Example Querying the current baud rate.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:BAUD?  
enter statement  
statement enters a numeric  
value  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem:COMMunicate :SERial[n] [:RECeive] :BITS  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:BITS < bits> Sets the number  
of bits to be used to transmit and receive data.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:BITS  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
bits  
numeric  
7| 8| MIN| MAX  
none  
Attempting to set bits to other than those values shown will result in an  
error -222.  
While this command operates independently of either the  
PARity:TYPE or SBITs commands, there are two combinations  
which are disallowed because of their data frame bit width. The following  
table shows the possible combinations:  
BITS  
PARity:TYPE  
NONE  
NONE  
Yes  
SBITs  
Frame Bits  
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
9 - disallowed  
10  
10  
Yes  
11  
NONE  
NONE  
Yes  
10  
11  
11  
Yes  
12 - disallowed  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set BITS to 8.  
Related Commands: SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PARity  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Configuring data width to 7 bits.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:BITS 7  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:BITS? [MIN | MAX] returns:  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:BITS?  
The current data width if no parameter is sent.  
The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent.  
The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent.  
Example Querying the current data width.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:BITS?  
enter statement  
statement enters 7 or 8  
7-40 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem :COMMunicate :SERial[n] [:RECeive] :PACE [:PROTocol]  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PACE[:PROTocol]  
< protocol> enables or disables receive pacing (XON/XOFF) protocol.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PACE [:PROTocol]  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
protocol  
discrete  
XON| NONE  
none  
Comments  
While PROT is XON, the serial interface will send XOFF when the  
buffer reaches the STOP threshold, and XON when the buffer reaches  
the STARt threshold.  
For an Agilent E1324A, AUTO is always ON. In this case  
[:RECeive]:PACE will also set TRAN:PACE  
The XON character is control Q (ASCII 1710, 1116), The XOFF  
character is control S (ASCII 1910, 1316).  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set PACE to XON.  
Related Commands: PROTocol:THReshold:STARt,  
PROTocol:THReshold:STOP, TRAN:AUTO  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Enabling XON/XOFF handshaking.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PACE:PROT XON  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PACE[:PROTocol]? returns the  
current receive pacing protocol.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PACE [:PROTocol]?  
Example See if XON/XOFF protocol is enabled.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PACE:PROT?  
enter statement  
statement enters the string  
"X O N " or "N O N E "  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem:COMMunicate :SERial[n] [:RECeive] :PACE :THReshold :STARt  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PACE:THReshold:STARt  
< char_count> configures the input buffer level at which the specified interface  
may send the XON character (ASCII 1116), assert the DTR line, and/or assert  
the RTS line.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PACE :THReshold  
:STARt  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
char_count  
numeric  
1 through 99 for built-in  
1 through 8191 for E1324A  
none  
To determine the size of the input buffer of the serial interface you are  
using, send SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PACE:THR:START? MAX. The  
returned value will be the buffer size less one.  
STARt must be set to less than STOP.  
The THR:STAR command has no effect unless  
PACE:PROT XON, CONT:DTR IBF, or CONT:DTR IBF has  
been sent.  
Related Commands: PACE:PROT XON | NONE, CONT:DTR,  
CONT:RTS  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Set interface to send XON when input buffer contains 10 characters.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PACE:PROT XON  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PACE:THR:STAR 10  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PACE:THReshold:STARt?  
[MIN | MAX] returns:  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PACE :THReshold  
:STARt?  
The current start threshold if no parameter is sent.  
The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent.  
The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent.  
Comments  
To determine the size of the input buffer of the serial interface you are  
using, send SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PACE:THR:START? MAX. The  
returned value will be the buffer size.  
Example Return current start threshold  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PACE:THR:STAR?query for threshold value  
enter statement  
statement enters a numeric  
value  
7-42 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem :COMMunicate :SERial[n] [:RECeive] :PACE :THReshold :STOP  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PACE:THReshold:STOP  
< char_count> configures the input buffer level at which the specified interface  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
may send the XOFF character (ASCII 1316), de-assert the DTR line, and/or  
de-assert the RTS line.  
:PACE :THReshold  
:STOP  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
char_count  
numeric  
1 through 99 for built-in  
1 through 8191 for E1324A  
none  
To determine the size of the input buffer of the serial interface you are  
using, send SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PACE:THR:STOP? MAX. The  
returned value will be the buffer size.  
STOP must be set to greater than STARt.  
The THR:STOP command has no effect unless  
PACE:PROT XON, CONT:DTR IBF, or CONT:DTR IBF has  
been sent.  
Related Commands: PACE:PROT XON | NONE, CONT:DTR,  
CONT:RTS  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Set interface to send XOFF when input buffer contains 80 characters.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PACE:THR:STOP 80  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PACE:THReshold:STOP?  
[MIN | MAX] returns:  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PACE :THReshold  
:STOP?  
The current stop threshold if no parameter is sent.  
The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent.  
The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent.  
Comments  
To determine the size of the input buffer of the serial interface you are  
using, send SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PACE:THR:STOP? MAX. The  
returned value will be the buffer size.  
Example Return current stop threshold  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PACE:THR:STOP?query for threshold  
enter statement  
statement enters a numeric  
value  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem:COMMunicate :SERial[n] [:RECeive] :PARity :CHECk  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PARity:CHECk < check_cntrl>  
controls whether or not the parity bit in received serial data frames will be  
considered significant.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PARity :CHECk  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
check_cntrl  
boolean  
0| 1| OFF| ON  
none  
When check_cntrl is set to 0 or OFF, received data is not checked for  
correct parity. Transmitted data still includes the type of parity  
configured with PARity:TYPE.  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set CHECk to OFF.  
Related Commands: SYST:COMM:SER[n]:PARity:TYPE  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Set parity check to ON  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PAR:CHEC ON  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PARity:CHECk? returns the  
state of parity checking.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PARity :CHECk?  
Example Is parity checking on or off?  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PAR:CHEC?  
enter statement  
statement enters 0 or 1  
:COMMunicate: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] < type>  
Configures the type of parity to be checked for received data, and generated for  
transmitted data.  
SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PARity [:TYPE]  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
type  
discrete  
EVEN| ODD| ZERO| ONE| NONE  
none  
Comments  
Attempting to set type to other than those values shown will result in an  
error -222.  
7-44 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem :COMMunicate: SERial[n] [:RECeive] :PARity [:TYPE]  
The following table defines each value of type:  
Value  
EVEN  
Definition  
If PARity:CHECK is ON, the received parity bit  
must maintain even parity. The transmitted parity  
bit will maintain even parity.  
ODD  
If PARity:CHECK is ON, the received parity bit  
must maintain odd parity. The transmitted parity  
bit will maintain odd parity.  
ZERO  
ONE  
If PARity:CHECK is ON, the received parity bit  
must be a zero. The transmitted parity bit will be a  
zero.  
If PARity:CHECK is ON, the received parity bit  
must be a logic one. The transmitted parity bit will  
be a logic one.  
NONE  
A parity bit must not be received in the serial data  
frame. No parity bit will be transmitted.  
While this command operates independently of either the BITS or  
SBITs commands, there are two combinations which are disallowed  
because of their data frame bit width. The following table shows the  
possible combinations:  
BITS  
PARity:TYPE  
NONE  
NONE  
Yes  
SBITs  
Frame Bits  
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
9 - disallowed  
10  
10  
Yes  
11  
NONE  
NONE  
Yes  
10  
11  
11  
Yes  
12 - disallowed  
Received parity will not be checked unless PAR:CHEC ON is has been  
sent. Transmitted data will include the specified parity whether  
PAR:CHEC is ON or OFF.  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set PARity to NONE.  
Related Commands: PAR:CHEC 1 | 0 | ON | OFF,  
SER[n]:BITS 7 | 8, SER[n]:SBITs 1 | 2  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Set parity check/generation to ODD.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PAR ODD  
Set parity type  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PAR:CHEC ON  
Enable parity check/gen.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem:COMMunicate :SERial[n] [:RECeive] :PARity [:TYPE]?  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE]? returns the  
type of parity checked and generated.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:PARity [:TYPE]?  
Example What type of parity checking is set?  
SYST:COMM:SER0:PAR?  
ask for parity type  
enter statement  
returns the string EVEN, ODD,  
ZERO, ONE, or NONE  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:SBITs < sbits> Sets the  
number of stop bits to be used to transmit and receive data.  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:SBITs  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
sbits  
numeric  
1| 2| MIN| MAX  
none  
Comments  
Attempting to set sbits to other than those values shown will result in an  
error -222.  
While this command operates independently of either the BITS or  
PARity:TYPE commands, there are two combinations which are  
disallowed because of their data frame bit width. The following table  
shows the possible combinations:  
BITS  
PARity:TYPE  
NONE  
NONE  
Yes  
SBITs  
Frame Bits  
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
9 - disallowed  
10  
10  
Yes  
11  
NONE  
NONE  
Yes  
10  
11  
11  
Yes  
12 - disallowed  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set SBITs to 1.  
Related Commands: SYST:COMM:SER[n]:BAUD  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Configuring for 2 stop bits.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:SBITS 2  
7-46 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem :COMMunicate :SERial[n] [:RECeive] :SBITs?  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n][:RECeive]:SBITs? [MIN | MAX] returns:  
:SERial[n] [:RECeive]  
:SBITs?  
The current stop bit setting if no parameter is sent.  
The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent.  
The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent.  
Example Querying the current stop bit configuration.  
SYST:COMM:SER0:SBITs?  
:REC is implied  
enter statement  
statement enters 1 or 2  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n]:TRANsmit:AUTO < auto_cntrl> when  
ON, sets the transmit pacing mode to be the same as that set for receive pacing.  
When OFF, the transmit pacing mode may be set independently of the receive  
pacing mode.  
:SERial[n] :TRANsmit  
:AUTO  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
auto_cntrl  
boolean  
0| 1| OFF| ON  
none  
Comments  
For an Agilent E1324A, AUTO is always ON. Trying to set OFF or 0 will  
generate an error.  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set AUTO to ON.  
Related Commands: SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PACE:PROT,  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:TRAN:PACE:PROT  
*RST Condition: TRAN:AUTO ON  
Example Link transmit pacing with receive pacing  
SYST:COMM:SER0:TRAN:AUTO ON  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n]:TRANsmit:AUTO? returns the current  
state of receive to transmit pacing linkage.  
:SERial[n] :TRANsmit  
:AUTO?  
Comments  
For an Agilent E1324A, AUTO is always ON. In this case AUTO? will  
always return a 1.  
Example Is AUTO ON or OFF?  
SYST:COMM:SER0:TRAN:AUTO?  
enter statement  
statement enters the number 1  
or 0  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem:COMMunicate :SERial[n]:TRANsmit :PACE [:PROTocol]  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n]:TRANsmit:PACE[:PROTocol]  
< protocol> enables or disables the transmit pacing (XON/XOFF) protocol.  
:SERial[n]:TRANsmit  
:PACE [:PROTocol]  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
protocol  
discrete  
XON| NONE  
none  
For an Agilent E1324A, AUTO is always ON. In this case  
TRAN:PACE will also set [RECeive]:PACE  
Receipt of an XOFF character (ASCII 1910, 1316) will hold off  
transmission of data until an XON character (ASCII 1710, 1116) is  
received.  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD will set PACE to XON.  
Related Commands: SYST:COMM:SER[n]:TRAN:AUTo  
*RST Condition: No change  
Example Set XON/XOFF transmit pacing  
SYST:COMM:SER0:TRAN:PACE:PROT XON  
:COMMunicate SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[n]:TRANsmit:PACE[:PROTocol]? returns  
the current transmit pacing protocol.  
:SERial[n] :TRANsmit  
:PACE [:PROTocol]?  
Example Check transmit pacing protocol  
SYST:COMM:SER0:TRAN:PACE:PROT?  
enter statement  
statement enters the string  
"X O N " or "N O N E "  
:DATE SYSTem:DATE < year> ,< month> ,< day> sets the E1300/E1301  
mainframes internal calendar.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
year  
month  
day  
numeric  
numeric  
numeric  
must round to 1980 to 2079  
must round to 1 to 12  
none  
none  
none  
must round to  
1 through last day of month  
Comments  
The upper limit on the day parameter is dependent on the month  
parameter and may be dependent on the year parameter in the case of a  
leap year.  
7-48 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem :DATE?  
Related Commands: SYST:TIME, SYST:TIME?, SYST:DATE?  
*RST Condition: *RST does not change the setting of the calendar.  
Example Setting the system Date  
SYST:DATE 1991,09,08  
set SEP 8, 1991  
:DATE? SYSTem:DATE? [ MIN| MAX,MIN| MAX,MIN| MAX] returns:  
When no parameter is sent: the current system date in the form  
+ YYYY,+ MM,+ DD, where YYYY can be the year 1980 through  
2079, MM can be the month 1 through 12, and DD can be the day 1  
through 31.  
When parameters are sent: the minimum or maximum allowable values  
for each of the three parameters. The parameter count must be three.  
Example Querying the system date  
SYST:DATE?  
ask for current date  
read back date  
input values of year,month,day  
:ERRor? SYSTem:ERR? queries the systems error queue. The response format is:  
< error number> ,"< error description string> ".  
Comments  
As system errors are detected, they are placed in the System Instrument  
error queue. The error queue is first in, first out. This means that if  
several error messages are waiting in the queue, each SYST:ERR? query  
will return the oldest error message, and that message will be deleted  
from the queue.  
If the error queue fills to 30 entries, the last error in the queue is replaced  
with error -350,"Too may errors". No further errors are accepted by the  
queue until space becomes available using SYST:ERR?, or the queue is  
cleared using *CLS.  
The SYST:ERR? command can be used to determine if any  
configuration errors occurred during the power-on sequence.  
When SYST:ERR? is sent while the error queue is empty, the System  
Instrument responds with + 0,"No error".  
Related Commands: *ESE, *ESR?, *SRE  
*RST Condition: Error queue is cleared  
Example Read all error messages from, and empty the error queue.  
loop statement  
SYST:ERR?  
loop to read all errors  
ask for error m essage  
enter statement  
input the error (a num ber), and  
error m essage (a string)  
until statement  
until error number is 0  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTem:TIME  
:TIME SYSTem:TIME < hour> ,< minute> ,< second> sets the E1300/E1301  
mainframes internal clock.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
hour  
numeric  
numeric  
numeric  
must round to 0 to 23  
must round to 0 to 59  
must round to 0 to 60  
none  
none  
none  
minute  
second  
Comments  
Related Commands: SYST:DATE, SYST:DATE?, SYST:TIME?  
*RST Condition: *RST does not change the Command Modules real  
time clock.  
Example Setting the system time  
SYST:TIME 14,30,20  
set 2:30:20 PM  
:TIME? SYSTem:TIME? [MAX| MIN,MAX| MIN,MAX| MIN] returns:  
When no parameter is sent; the current system time in the form  
+ HH,+ MM,+ SS, where HH can be 0 through 23 hours, MM can be 0  
through 59 minutes, and SS can be 0 through 60 seconds.  
When parameters are sent; the minimum or maximum allowable values  
for each of the three parameters. The parameter count must be three.  
Example Querying the system time  
SYST:TIME?  
ask for current tim e  
read back time  
input values of hour,min,sec  
:VERSion? SYSTem:VERSion? Returns the SCPI version for which this instrument  
complies.  
Comments  
The returned information is in the format: YYYY.R; where YYYY is the  
year, and R is the revision number within that year.  
Related Commands: *IDN?  
Example Determine compliance version for this instrument.  
SYST:VERS?  
enter statement  
Statement enters 1990.0  
7-50 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TRIGger :DELay  
TRIGger  
The TRIGger command subsystem controls the behavior of the trigger system  
once it is initiated (see INITiate command subsystem). The trigger command  
subsystem controls:  
The delay between trigger and first Pacer pulse (TRIG:DELay)  
An immediate software trigger (TRIG:IMM)  
The source of the trigger (TRIG:SOUR BUS| EXT| HOLD| IMM)  
Subsystem Syntax TRIGger  
:DELay < delay>  
:DELay? [MIN | MAX]  
[:IMMediate]  
:SLOPe < slope>  
:SLOPe?  
:SOURce BUS | EXT | HOLD | IMM  
:SOURce?  
:DELay TRIGger:DELay < delay> sets the delay between receipt of trigger and first  
Pacer pulse.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
delay  
numeric  
250E-9s to 4.19430375s or  
MIN| MAX  
second  
Comments  
The resolution for delay is 250E-9 seconds.  
Related Commands: ABORt, INITiate  
*RST Condition: TRIG:DELay 2.5E-9  
Example Setting delay between trigger and Pacer output.  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 100  
SOUR:PULS:PER .1 S  
TRIG:DELAY .75 S  
INIT  
trigger is TRIG command  
set Pacer to output 100 pulses  
pulse period set to .1 second  
start Pacer .75 sec after trigger  
go to Wait For Trigger state  
trigger Pacer to output pulses  
TRIG  
:DELay? TRIGger:DELay? [MIN | MAX] returns:  
The current delay if no parameter is sent.  
The maximum allowable delay if MAX is sent.  
The minimum allowable delay if MIN is sent.  
Example Querying the trigger delay setting.  
TRIG:DEL .75 S  
start Pacer .75 sec after trigger  
TRIG:DEL?  
command System Instrument  
to send TRIG:DEL value.  
enter statement  
input value of trigger delay  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TRIGger[:IMMediate]  
[:IMMediate] TRIGger:IMMediate will cause a trigger cycle to occur immediately, provided  
that the trigger system has been initiated (INITiate).  
Comments  
Related Commands: ABORt, INITiate  
*RST Condition: This command is an event and has no *RST condition.  
Example Triggering the Pacer.  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD  
trigger source is TRIG  
command  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 1E3  
SOUR:PULS:PER .1 S  
TRIG:DELAY .75 S  
INIT  
output 1000 Pacer pulses  
pulse period set to .1 second  
start Pacer .75 sec after trigger  
go to Wait For Trigger state  
trigger Pacer to output pulses.  
TRIG  
:SLOPe TRIGger:SLOPe < slope> is for SCPI compatibility. The mainframes "Event  
In" signal only triggers on a negative going edge.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
slope  
discrete  
NEGative  
none  
Comments  
Trying to set SLOPe to other than NEG will generate an error.  
Related Commands: ABORt, INITiate,  
:SLOPe? TRIGger:SLOPe? returns the current trigger slope setting. Since the  
mainframes "Event In" signal only triggers on a negative going edge,  
TRIG:SLOP? will always return "NEG".  
:SOURce TRIGger:SOURce < trig_source> configures the trigger system to respond to  
the specified source.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
trig_source  
character  
BUS| EXT| HOLD| IMM  
none  
7-52 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TRIGger :SOURce?  
Comments  
The following table explains the possible choices.  
Parameter Value  
Source of Trigger  
BUS  
Group Execute Trigger (GET) bus command,  
*TRG common command, or TRIGger  
command.  
EXTernal  
HOLD  
“Event In” signal at rear panel BNC  
connector, or TRIGger command.  
Only the TRIGger command will cause  
trigger.  
IMMediate  
The trigger signal is always true (continuous  
triggering).  
While an instrument which uses the "Event In"signal has EXT set, no  
other instrument which uses the "Event In"signal may set EXT, or an  
error 1500 "External trigger source already allocated" will result.  
While TRIG:SOUR is IMM, you need only INITiate the trigger system to  
start the Pacer.  
Related Commands: ABORt, INITiate, *TRG  
*RST Condition: TRIG:SOUR IMM  
Example Specifying the Trigger Source.  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD  
trigger source is TRIG  
command  
SOUR:PULS:COUN 1E3  
SOUR:PULS:PER .1 S  
TRIG:DELAY .75 S  
INIT  
output 1000 Pacer pulses  
pulse period set to .1 second  
start Pacer .75 sec after trigger  
go to Wait For Trigger state  
TRIG  
trigger the Pacer to output  
pulses.  
:SOURce?  
TRIGger:SOURce? returns the current trigger source configuration. Response  
data can be one of; BUS, EXT, HOLD, or IMM. See the TRIG:SOUR  
command for more response data information.  
Example Querying the Trigger Source.  
TRIG:SOUR HOLD  
trigger source is TRIG  
command  
TRIG:SOUR?  
ask System Instrument to  
return trigger source  
configuration  
enter statement  
input selection of trigger source  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI:CONFigure :DLADdress?  
VXI  
The VXI command subsystem provides for:  
Determining the number, type, and logical address of the devices  
(instruments) installed in the E1300/E1301 mainframe.  
Direct access to VXIbus A16 registers within devices installed in the  
Mainframe.  
Subsystem Syntax VXI  
:CONFigure  
:DeviceLADd?  
:DeviceLISt?  
:DeviceNUMber?  
:HEIRarchy  
:ALL?  
:INFormation?  
:ALL?  
:LADDress?  
:NUMber?  
:READ? < logical_addr> ,< register_num>  
:REGister  
:READ? < numeric_value.| < register_name>  
:WRITe < numeric_value> | < register_name>  
:RESet?  
:SELect < numeric_value>  
:WRITe < logical_addr> ,< register_num> ,< data>  
:CONFigure VXI:CONF:DLAD? returns a comma separated decimal numeric list of device  
logical addresses currently installed in the mainframe. If the Command Module  
is not the resource manager, it only returns the logical addresses of the devices  
in its servant area.  
:DLADdress?  
Comments  
Use the VXI:CONF:DNUM? command to determine the number of  
values which will be returned by VXI:CONF:DLAD?.  
Use each of the logical addresses returned by VXI:CONF:DLAD? with  
VXI:CONF:DLIS? to determine the types of devices installed.  
VXI:CONF:DEVICELAD? is also accepted.  
This command has been retained for compatibility with existing  
programs. For new programs you should use the VXI:CONF:LADD?  
command.  
Related Commands: VXI:CONF:DLIS?, VXI:CONF:DNUM?,  
VXI:CONF:LADD?  
Example Determining the device addresses within the system  
VXI:CONF:DLAD?  
query for list of addresses.  
list of addresses.  
enter statement  
7-54 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI :CONFigure:DLISt?  
:CONFigure:DLISt? VXI:CONF:DLIS? [ < logical_addr> ] returns information about the device  
specified by logical_addr. Response data is in the form:  
n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, s1, s2, s3, s4  
Where the fields above are defined as:  
n fields  
c fields  
s fields  
Indicate numeric data response fields.  
Indicate character data response fields.  
Indicate string data response fields.  
n1 Device’s Logical Address. A number from 0 to 255.  
n2 Commander’s Logical Address. A number from -1 to 255; -1 means this  
device has no commander.  
n3 Manufacturer’s ID. A number from 0 to 4095.  
n4 Model Code. A number from 0 to 65535, chosen by the manufacturer to  
signify the model of this device.  
n5 Slot Number. A number between -1 and the number of slots in this  
mainframe; -1 indicates that the slot associated with this device is  
unknown. This is always -1 for B size mainframes.  
n6 Slot 0 Logical Address. A number from 0 to 255.  
c1 Device Class. 3 data characters; EXT| HYB| MEM| MSG| REG| VME.  
EXT = Extended device, HYB = hybrid device (e.g. IBASIC),  
MEM = memory device, MSG = Message-based device,  
REG = Register-based device, VME = VME device  
c2 Memory Space. Up to 4 data characters; A16| A24| A32| NONE| RES.  
A16 = A16 addressing mode, A24 = A24 addressing mode, A32 =  
A32 addressing mode, NONE = no addressing mode, RES = reserved.  
c3 Memory Offset. 10 data characters which define the base address of the  
A24 or A32 address space on the device. This value is expressed in hex  
format (first two characters are # H).  
c4 Memory Size. 10 data characters which define the size of the A24 or  
A32 address space in bytes. This value is expressed in hex format (first  
two characters are # H).  
c5 Pass/Failed. Up to 5 data characters which define the status of the  
device; FAIL | IFAIL | PASS | READY. FAIL = failed self-test,  
IFAIL = configuration register initialization fails,  
PASS = self-test passed, READY = ready to receive commands  
s1 Extended Field 1. Not currently used; returns ""  
s2 Extended Field 2. Not currently used; returns ""  
s3 Extended Field 3. Not currently used; returns ""  
s4 Manufacturer’s Specific Comments. Up to 80 character string contains  
manufacturer specific data in string response data format. This field is  
sent with a 488.2 string response data format, and will contain the  
instrument name and its IEEE 488.1 secondary address unless a  
start-up error is detected. In that case, this field will contain one or  
more error codes in the form "CNFG ERROR: n, m, ...,z" . See  
Appendix B, Table B-3 for a complete list of these codes.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI:CONFigure :DNUMber?  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
logical_addr  
numeric  
0-255 (or nothing)  
none  
Comments  
When logical_addr is not specified, VXI:CONF:DLIS? returns  
information for each of the devices installed, separated by semicolons. If  
the Command Module is not the resource manager, it returns  
information on only the devices in its servant area.  
Cards which are part of a combined instrument such as a switchbox or  
scanning voltmeter always return the same manufacturers comments as  
the first card in the instrument. Information in the other fields  
correspond to the card for which the Logical Address was specified.  
This command has been retained for compatibility with existing  
programs. For new programs you should use the VXI:CONF:INF?  
command.  
Related Commands: VXI:CONF:DLAD?, VXI:CONF:DNUM?,  
VXI:CONF:INF?, CONF:HEIR?  
Example Querying the device list for the System Instrument  
dimension string[1000]  
string size large in case of  
multiple device list  
VXI:CONF:DLIS? 0  
Ask for the device list for the  
System Instrument  
enter string  
enter return data into string  
Example response data (no error):+ 0, -1, + 4095, + 1301, + 0, + 0, HYB, NONE,  
# H00000000, # H00000000, READY, "", "", "", "SYSTEM INSTALLED AT SECONDARY  
ADDR 0"  
Example response data (with error):+ 255, + 0, + 4095, + 65380, -1, + 0, REG, A16,  
# H00000000, # H00000000, READY, "", "", "", "CNFG ERROR: 11"  
:CONFigure :DNUMber? VXI:CONF:DNUM? returns the number of devices installed in the mainframe  
(including the System Instrument itself). If the Command Module is not the  
resource manager, it returns the number of devices in its servant area.  
Comments  
Use the VXI:CONF:DNUM? command to determine the number of  
values which will be returned by VXI:CONF:DLAD?.  
This command has been retained for compatibility with existing  
programs. For new programs you should use VXI:CONF:NUMB?  
Related Commands: VXI:CONF:DLAD?, VXI:CONF:DLIS?  
Example Determining the number of devices within the system  
VXI:CONF:DNUM?  
query the number of devices  
input number of devices  
enter statement  
7-56 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI :CONFigure :HIERarchy?  
:CONFigure VXI:CONF:HIER? Returns current hierarchy configuration information about  
the selected logical address. The individual fields of the response are comma  
:HIERarchy?  
separated. If the information about the selected logical address is not available  
from the destination device (i.e., the requested device is not in the mainframe)  
then Error -224 ("parameter error") will be set and no response data will be sent.  
NOTE  
This command is included in the E1300/E1301 because it is a required SCPI  
command. Since there are no message based devices in the E1300/E1301, most  
of these fields will be null valued for the E1300/E1301.  
Comments  
This command returns the following values:  
Logical address: an integer between -1 and 255 inclusive. -1  
indicates that the device has no logical address.  
Commander’s logical address: an integer between -1 and 255  
inclusive. -1 indicates that the device has no commander or that the  
commander is unknown. This value is always 0 for the E1300/E1301.  
Interrupt handlers: a comma separated list of seven integers  
between 0 and 7 inclusive. Interrupt lines 1–7 are mapped to the  
individual return values. 0 is used to indicate that the particular  
interrupt handler is not configured. A set of return values of  
0,0,0,5,2,0,6 would indicate that:  
handler 4 is configured to handle interrupts on line 5  
handler 5 is configured to handle interrupts on line 2  
handler 7 is configured to handle interrupts on line 6  
handlers 1, 2, 3, and 6 are not configured  
Interrupters: a comma separated list of seven integers between 0  
and 7 inclusive. Interrupt lines 1–7 are mapped to the individual  
return values. 0 is used to indicate that the particular interrupter is  
not configured. A set of return values of 0,0,0,5,2,0,6 would indicate  
that:  
interrupter 4 is configured to handle interrupts on line 5  
interrupter 5 is configured to handle interrupts on line 2  
interrupter 7 is configured to handle interrupts on line 6  
interrupters 1, 2, 3, and 6 are not configured  
Pass/Failed: an integer which contains the pass/fail status of the  
specified device encoded as follows:  
0 = FAIL, 1 = IFAIL, 2 = PASS, 3 = READY  
Manufacturer’s Specific Comments. Up to 80 character string  
contains manufacturer specific data in string response data format.  
This field is sent with a 488.2 string response data format, and will  
contain the instrument name and its IEEE 488.1 secondary address  
unless a start-up error is detected. In that case, this field will contain  
one or more error codes in the form "CNFG ERROR: n, m, ...,z" .  
See Appendix B, Table B-3 for a complete list of these codes.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI:CONFigure :HIERarchy:ALL?  
Cards which are part of a combined instrument such as a switchbox or  
scanning voltmeter always return the same manufacturers comments as  
the first card in the instrument. Information in the other fields  
correspond to the card for which the Logical Address was specified.  
Related Commands: VXI:SEL, VXI:CONF:HEIR:ALL?,  
VXI:CONF:LADD?  
:CONFigure VXI:CONF:HIER:ALL? Returns the configuration information about all logical  
addresses in the E1300/E1301 mainframe. The information is returned in the  
:HIERarchy:ALL?  
order specified in the response to VXI:CONF:LADD?. The information about  
multiple logical adddresses will be semicolon separated and follow the IEEE  
488.2 response message format. Individual fields of the output are comma  
separated.  
NOTE  
This command is included in the E1300/E1301 because it is a required SCPI  
command. Since there are no message based devices in the E1300/E1301, most  
of these fields will be null valued for this E1300/E1301.  
Comments  
Related Commands: VXI:CONF:HEIR?, VXI:SEL, VXI:CONF:LADD?  
:CONFigure VXI:CONF:INF? Returns the static information about the selected logical  
address (see VXI:SELect). The individual fields of the response are comma  
:INFormation?  
separated. If the information about the selected logical address is not available  
from the destination device (i.e., the requested device is not in the mainframe)  
then Error -224 ("parameter error") will be set and no response data will be sent.  
The command returns the following values:  
Logical address: an integer between -1 and 255 inclusive. -1 indicates  
that the device has no logical address.  
Manufacturer ID: an integer between -1 and 4095 inclusive. -1 indicates  
that the device has no Manufacturer ID.  
Model code: an integer between -1 and 65535 inclusive. -1 indicates that  
the device has no model code.  
Device class: an integer between 0 and 5 inclusive. 0 = VXIbus memory  
device, 1 = VXIbus extended device, 2 = VXIbus message based device,  
3 = VXIbus register based device, 4 = Hybrid device, 5 = Non-VXIbus  
device.  
Address space: an integer between 0 and 15 inclusive, which is the sum of  
the binary weighted codes of the address space(s) occupied by the device.  
1 = The device has A16 registers, 2 = The device has A24 registers, 4 =  
The device has A32 registers, 8 = The device has A64 registers.  
A16 memory offset: an integer between -1 and 65535 inclusive. Indicates  
the base address for any A16 registers (other than the VXIbus defined  
7-58 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI :CONFigure :INFormation?  
registers) which are present on the device. -1 indicates that the device has  
no A16 memory.  
A24 memory offset: an integer between -1 and 16777215 inclusive.  
Indicates the base address for any A24 registers which are present on the  
device. -1 indicates that the device has no A24 memory.  
A32 memory offset: an integer between -1 and 4294967295 inclusive.  
Indicates the base address for any A32 registers which are present on the  
device. -1 indicates that the device has no A32 memory.  
A16 memory size: an integer between -1 and 65535 inclusive. Indicates  
the the number of bytes reserved for any A16 registers (other than the  
VXIbus defined registers) which are present on the device. -1 indicates  
that the device has no A16 memory.  
A24 memory size: an integer between -1 and 16777215 inclusive. Indicates  
the number of bytes reserved for any A24 registers which are present on  
the device. -1 indicates that the device has no A24 memory.  
A32 memory seze: an integer between -1 and 4294967295 inclusive.  
Indicates the number of bytes reserved for any A32 registers which are  
present on the device. -1 indicates that the device has no A32 memory.  
Slot number: an integer between -1 and the number of slots which exist in  
the cage. -1 indicates that the slot which contains this device is unknown.  
Slot 0 logical address: an integer between -1 and 255 inclusive. -1  
indicates that the Slot 0 device associated with this device is unknown.  
Subclass: an integer representing the contents of the subclass register. -1  
indicates that the subclass register is not defined for this device.  
Attribute: an integer representing the contents of the attribute register. -1  
indicates that the attribute register is not defined for this device.  
Manufacturer’s Specific Comments. Up to 80 character string contains  
manufacturer specific data in string response data format. This field is  
sent with a 488.2 string response data format, and will contain the  
instrument name and its IEEE 488.1 secondary address unless a start-up  
error is detected. In that case, this field will contain one or more error  
codes in the form "CNFG ERROR: n, m, ...,z" . See Appendix B, Table  
B-3 for a complete list of these codes.  
Comments  
Related Commands: VXI:SEL, VXI:CONF:INF:ALL?,  
VXI:CONF:LADD?  
Example Query information on logical address 0.  
VXI:SEL 0  
select the logical address  
ask for data  
VXI:CONF:INF?  
enter statement  
return data  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI:CONFigure :INFormation:ALL?  
:CONFigure VXI:CONF:INF:ALL? Returns the static information about all logical  
addresses. The information is returned in the order specified in the response to  
VXI:CONF:LADD?. The information about multiple logical adddresses will be  
semicolon separated and follow the IEEE 488.2 response message format.  
Individual fields of the output are comma separated.  
:INFormation:ALL?  
Comments  
Related Commands: VXI:SEL, VXI:CONF:INF?, VXI:CONF:LADD?  
:CONFigure VXI:CONF:LADD? Returns a comma separated list of logical addresses of  
devices in the mainframe. This is an integer between 1 and 256 inclusive. The  
logical address of the device responding to the command will be the first entry in  
the list.  
:LADDress?  
Comments  
Related Commands: VXI:CONF:NUMB?  
:CONFigure :NUMBer? VXI:CONF:NUMB? Returns the number of devices in the system. This is an  
integer between 1 and 256 inclusive.  
Comments  
Related Commands: VXI:CONF:LADD?  
:READ? VXI:READ? < logical_addr> ,< register_addr> allows access to the entire 64  
byte A16 register address space for the device specified by logical_addr. Since  
the VXIbus system is byte-addressed, while the registers are 16 bits wide,  
registers are specified by even addresses only. This method of identifying  
registers follows the VXIbus standard format.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
logical_addr  
decimal  
numeric  
must round to 0 through 255  
none  
register_addr  
numeric  
must round to an even value  
from 0 through 62 (3E16)  
none  
Comments  
Specifying an odd register address will cause an error 2003,"Invalid word  
address".  
Specifying a logical address not currently in the system will cause an error  
2005,"No card at logical address".  
Logical_addr must be specified in decimal. Register_addr may be  
specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary (# B).  
This command has been retained for compatibility with existing  
programs. For new programs you should use the VXI:REG:READ?  
command.  
Accesses are 16-bit non-privileged data accesses.  
7-60 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI :REGister:READ?  
Related Commands: VXI:WRITE, VXI:REG:READ?  
Example Read from one of a device’s configuration registers  
VXI:READ? 8,0  
read ID register on device at  
Logical Address 8  
enter statement  
enter value from device register  
:REGister:READ? VXI:REG:READ? < register> returns the contents of the specified 16 bit  
register at the selected logical address as an integer (see VXI:SELect). The  
register is specified as the byte address of the desired register or optionally as  
the register name.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
register  
numeric  
even numbers from 0 to 62 or  
register name (see below)  
none  
Comments  
The register parameter can be all even numbers from 0 to 62 inclusive (as  
a < numeric_value> ) or the following (optional) words:  
A24Low: A24 Pointer Low register (18)  
A24High: A24 Pointer High register (16)  
A32Low: A32 Pointer Low register (22)  
A32High: A32 Pointer High register (20)  
ATTRibute: Attribute register (8)  
DHIGh: Data High register (12)  
DLOW: Data Low register (14)  
DTYPe: Device Type register (2)  
ICONtrol: Interrupt control register (28)  
ID: ID register (0)  
ISTatus: Interrupt Status register (26)  
MODid: MODID register (8)  
OFFSet: Offset register (6)  
PROTocol: Protocol register (8)  
RESPonse: Response register (10)  
SNHigh: Serial Number High register (10)  
SNLow: Serial Number Low register (12)  
STATus: Status register (4)  
SUBClass: Subclass register (30)  
VNUMber: Version Number register (14)  
Related Commands: VXI:SEL, VXI:REG:WRIT  
Example Read from a register on the currently selected device  
VXI:READ? CONT  
Read from the control register  
of the currently seected device  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI:REGister:WRITe  
:REGister:WRITe  
VXI:REG:WRITe? < register> ,< data> writes to the specified 16 bit register at  
the selected logical address (see VXI:SELect). The data is a 16 bit value  
specified as a numeric value in the range of -32768 to 32767 or 0 to 65535. The  
register is specified as the byte address of the desired register or optionally as  
the register name.  
Parameters  
Comments  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
register  
numeric  
even numbers from 0 to 62 or  
register name (see below)  
none  
data  
numeric  
-32768 to 65535  
none  
The register parameter can be all even numbers from 0 to 62 inclusive (as  
a < numeric_value> ) or the following (optional) words:  
CONTrol: Control Register (4)  
DEXTended: Data Extended register (10)  
DHIGh: Data High register (12)  
DLOW: Data Low register (14)  
ICONtrol: Interrupt Control register (28)  
MODid: MODID register (8)  
LADDress: Logical Address register (0)  
OFFSet: Offset register (6)  
SIGNal: Signal register (8)  
Related Commands: VXI:SEL, VXI:REG:READ?  
Example Write to a register on the currently selected device  
VXI:REG:WRIT? DHIG,64  
writes "64’ to the Data High  
register  
Reset? VXI:RESET? resets the selected logical address. SYSFAIL generation is  
inhibited while the device is in the self test state. The command waits for 5  
seconds or until the selected device has indicated passed (whichever occurs  
first). If the device passes its self test SYSFAIL generation is re-enabled. If the  
device fails its self test SYSFAIL generation remains inhibited. The return value  
from this command is the state of the selected device after it has been reset. The  
command returns an integer encoded as followed.  
0 = FAIL  
2 = PASS  
3 = READY  
The state of the A24/A32 enable bit is not altered by this command  
Comments  
Related Commands: VXI:SEL  
7-62 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI :SELect  
:SELect VXI:SELect < logical_addr> specifies the logical address which is to be used by  
many subsequent commands in the VXI subsystem.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
logical_addr  
numeric  
0 through 255  
none  
Comments  
The *RST default value for logical_addr is that no logical address is  
selected (i.e., -1). All other commands which require a logical address to  
be selected will respond with Error -221 ("settings conflict") if no logical  
address is selected.  
When a command encounters an Error -240 ("Hardware Error") the  
equivalent of a *RST is executed. This will cause the selected logical  
address to be set to -1.  
Related Commands: VXI:CONF:LADD?  
Example Select a logical address  
VXI:SEL 64  
sets the logical address to be  
used by subsequent VXI  
subsystem commands to 64.  
:SELect? VXI:SELect? returnsthe logical address which will be used by many subsequent  
commands in the VXI subsystem. If no logical address has been selected, this  
query will return -1.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VXI:WRITe  
:WRITe VXI:WRITe < logical_addr> ,< register_addr> ,< data> allows access to the  
entire 64 byte A16 register address space for the device specified by  
logical_addr. Since the VXIbus system is byte-addressed, while the registers are  
16 bits wide, registers are specified by even addresses only. This method of  
identifying registers follows the VXIbus standard format.  
Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Type  
Range of  
Values  
Default  
Units  
logical_addr  
register_addr  
data  
decimal  
numeric  
Must round to 0 through 255  
none  
none  
none  
numeric  
must round to an even value  
from 0 through 62 (3Eh)  
numeric  
must round to -32768 to 32767  
(0 to FFFFh)  
Comments  
Specifying an odd register address will cause an error 2003,"Invalid word  
address".  
Specifying a logical address not currently in use in the system will cause  
an error 2005,"No card at logical address".  
Logical_addr must be specified in decimal. Register_addr and data may  
be specified in decimal, hex (# H), octal (# Q), or binary (# B).  
This command has been retained for compatibility with existing  
programs. For new programs you should use the VXI:REG:WRIT  
command.  
Accesses are 16-bit non-privileged data accesses.  
Related Commands: VXI:READ?, VXI:REG:WRIT  
Example Write a value into a device’s device dependent register.  
VXI:WRIT 8,24,# H4200 write hex 4200 (16,896  
decimal) to register 24 of device  
at Logical Address 8  
7-64 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Common  
Command  
Reference  
This section describes the IEEE-488.2 Common Commands that can be used to  
program instruments in the mainframe. Commands are listed by command  
groups in the summary table below, and alphabetically in the rest of this section.  
Examples are shown when the command has parameters or returns a response;  
otherwise the command string is as shown in the headings in this section. For  
additional information on any Common Commands, refer to the IEEE Standard  
488.2-1987 (see "Related Documentation"in the front of this manual for more  
information on this standard).  
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Functional Groupings  
Category  
Command  
Title  
General  
*IDN  
*RST  
*TST?  
*CLS  
Identification Query  
Reset Command  
Self-Test Query  
Clear Status Command  
Standard Event Status Enable  
Command  
Instrument Status  
*ESE < mask>  
*ESE?  
*ESR?  
Standard Event Status Enable  
Query  
*PSC  
*PSC?  
Standard Event Status Register  
Query  
Power-On Status Clear Command  
Power-On Status Clear Query  
*SRE < mask>  
*SRE?  
*STB?  
Macros  
*DMC < name> ,< cmds> Service Request Enable Command  
*EMC < state>  
Service Request Enable Query  
Status Byte Query  
*EMC?  
*GMC? < name>  
*LMC?  
Define Macro Command  
Enable Macros Command  
Enable Macro Query  
*PMC  
*RMC < name>  
*OPC  
Get Macro Query  
Learn Macro Query  
Synchronization  
*OPC?  
Purge all Macros Command  
Remove individual Macro  
Command  
*WAI  
Operation Complete Command  
Operation Complete Query  
Wait-to-Continue Command  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*CLS Clear Status Command. The *CLS command clears all status registers  
(Standard Event Status Register, Standard Operation Event Status Register,  
Questionable Data Event Register) and the error queue for an instrument. This  
clears the corresponding summary bits (bits 3, 5, & 7) and the  
instrument-specific bits (bits 0, 1, & 2) in the Status Byte Register. *CLS does  
not affect the enabling of bits in any of the status registers (Status Byte Register,  
Standard Event Status Register, Standard Operation Event Status Register, or  
Questionable Data Event Status Register). (The SCPI command  
STATus:PRESet does clear the Standard Operation Status Enable and  
Questionable Status Enable registers.) *CLS disables the Operation Complete  
function (*OPC command) and the Operation Complete Query function  
(*OPC? command).  
*DMC < name_string> , Define Macro Command. Assigns one, or a sequence of commands to a macro  
name.  
< command_block>  
The command sequence may be composed of SCPI and/or Common commands.  
The name given to the macro may be the same as a SCPI command, but may not  
be the same as a Common command. When a SCPI named macro is executed,  
the macro rather than the SCPI command is executed. To regain the function of  
the SCPI command, execute the *EMC 0 command.  
Example  
Create a macro to return the System Instruments Device list.  
OUTPUT 70900;"*DMC ’LIST’,# 0VXI:CONF:DLIS?"  
Note that the name LIST is in quotes. The second parameter type is arbitrary  
block program data. The characters that define a command message are prefixed  
by the characters # 0 (pound zero). For a more information on this parameter  
type, see Parameter Types in the first part of this chapter.  
*EMC < enable>  
Enable Macros Command. When enable is non-zero, macros are enabled. When  
enable is zero, macros are disabled.  
*EMC? Enable Macros Query. Returns either 1 (macros are enabled), or 0 (macros are  
disabled) for the selected instrument.  
*ESE < mask>  
Standard Event Status Enable Register Command. Enables one or more events  
in the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in bit 5 (the Standard  
Event Status Summary Bit) of the Status Byte Register. You enable an event by  
specifying its decimal weight for < mask> . To enable more than one event,  
specify the sum of the decimal weights. Refer to "Standard Event Status  
Register"earlier in this chapter for a table showing the contents of the Standard  
Event Status Register.  
Example  
OUTPUT 70900;"*ESE 60"  
Enables bits 2, 3, 4, & 5.  
Respective weights are 4 + 8  
+ 16 + 32 = 60  
7-66 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*ESE? Standard Event Status Enable Query. Returns the weighted sum of all enabled  
(unmasked) bits in the Standard Event Status Register.  
Example  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*ESE?"  
20 ENTER 70900;A  
30 PRINT A  
Sends status enable query  
Places response in variable  
Prints response  
40 END  
*ESR? Standard Event Status Register Query. Returns the weighted sum of all set bits  
in the Standard Event Status Register. After reading the register, *ESR? clears  
the register. The events recorded in the Standard Event Status Register are  
independent of whether or not those events are enabled with the *ESE  
command.  
Example  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*ESR?"  
Sends Standard Event Status  
Register query  
20 ENTER 70900;A  
30 PRINT A  
Places response in variable  
Prints response  
40 END  
*GMC? < name_string>  
Get Macro Query. Returns arbitrary block response data which contains the  
command or command sequence defined by name_string. The command  
sequence will be prefixed with characters which indicate the number of  
characters that follow the prefix.  
Example  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*GMC? ’LIST’"  
20 ENTER 70900;Cmds$  
30 PRINT Cmds$  
ask for definition of macro  
from *DMC example  
enter into Cmds$ the definition  
of the macro "LIST"  
Cmds$= # 214VXI:CONF:  
DLIS?  
40 END  
In this case, the prefix consists of "# 214". The 2 says to expect two  
character-counting digits. The 14 says that 14 characters of data follow. Had the  
returned macro been shorter, such as # 15*EMC?, we would read this as 1  
counting digit indicating 5 data characters.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*IDN? Identity. Returns the device identity. The response consists of the following four  
fields (fields are separated by commas):  
Manufacturer  
Model Number  
Serial Number (returns 0 if not available)  
Firmware Revision (returns 0 if not available)  
The *IDN? command returns the following command string for the E1301B:  
AGILENT,E1301B,0,A,07.00  
This command will return the following string for the E1300B:  
AGILENT,E1300B,0,A,07.00  
NOTE  
The revision will vary with the revision of the ROM installed in the system. This  
is the only indication of which version of ROM is in the box. The major number  
(01 in the examples) indicates whether there have been functional changes made  
in this ROM. The minor number (00 in the examples) indicates whether only  
bug fixes and minor changes were made.  
Example Get the ID fields from the system and print them.  
10 DIM A$[50]  
Dimension array for ID fields  
Queries identity  
20 OUTPUT 70900;"*IDN?"  
30 ENTER 70900;A$  
40 PRINT A$  
Places ID fields in array  
Print ID fields  
50 END  
*LMC? Learn Macros Query. Returns a quoted string name for each currently defined  
macro. If more than one macro is defined, the quoted strings are separated by  
commas (,). If no macro is defined, then a quoted null string ("") is returned.  
*LRN? Learn query command. *LRN? causes the instrument to respond with a string of  
SCPI commands which define the instruments current state. Your application  
program can enter the *LRN? response data into a string variable, later to be  
sent back to the instrument to restore that configuration.  
Example response from an Agilent E1326B voltmeter in the power-on state:  
*RST;:CAL:ZERO:AUTO 1; :CAL:LFR + 60; VAL + 0.00000000E+ 000;  
:DISP:MON:STAT 0; CHAN (@0); :FORM ASC,+ 7; :FUNC "VOLT";  
:MEM:VME:ADDR + 2097152; SIZE + 0; STAT 0; :RES:APER  
+ 1.666667E-002; OCOM 0; RANG + 1.638400E+ 004; RANG:AUTO  
1;:VOLT:APER + 1.666667E-002; RANG + 8.000000E+ 000; RANG:AUTO  
1; :TRIG:COUN + 1; DEL + 0.00000000E+ 000; DEL:AUTO 1; :TRIG:SOUR  
IMM; :SAMP:COUN + 1; SOUR IMM;TIM + 5.000000E-002 S  
7-68 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE  
The System Instrument no longer implements the *LRN? command.  
Attempting to have the System Instrument execute this command will generate  
an error -113 “Undefined header”.  
*OPC Operation Complete. Causes an instrument to set bit 0 (Operation Complete  
Message) in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending operations  
have been completed. By enabling this bit to be reflected in the Status Byte  
Register (*ESE 1 command), you can ensure synchronization between the  
instrument and an external computer or between multiple instruments. (Refer to  
"Synchronizing an External Computer and Instruments"earlier in this chapter  
for an example).  
*OPC? Operation Complete Query. Causes an instrument to place an ASCII 1 into the  
instruments output queue when all pending instrument operations are finished.  
By requiring the computer to read this response before continuing program  
execution, you can ensure synchronization between one or more instruments  
and the computer. (Refer to "Synchronizing an External Computer and  
Instruments"earlier in this chapter for an example).  
*PMC Purge Macros Command. Purges all currently defined macros in the selected  
instrument.  
*PSC < flag>  
Power-on Status Clear Command. Controls the automatic power-on clearing of  
the Service Request Enable register and Standard Event Status Enable register.  
Executing *PSC 1 disables any previously enabled bits at power-on, preventing  
the System Instrument from requesting service when power is cycled. Executing  
*PSC 0 causes any previously enabled bits to remain enabled at power-on which  
allows the System Instrument to request service (if it has been enabled - *SRE)  
when power is cycled. The value of flagis stored in non-volatile memory.  
Example This example configures the System Instrument to request service from the  
external computer whenever power is cycled.  
Status Byte register and Standard Event Status register bits  
remain enabled (unmasked) after cyclingpower  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*PSC 0"  
Enable bit 5 (Standard Event Status Register Summary Bit)  
in the Status Byte Register  
20 OUTPUT 70900;"*SRE 32"  
Enable bit 7 (Power-on bit) in the Standard Event Status  
Register to be reflected as bit 5 in the Status Byte Register  
30 OUTPUT 70900;"*ESE 128"  
*PSC? Power-on status clear query. Returns a response indicating whether an  
instruments Status Byte Register and Standard Event Status Register bits  
remain enabled or become disabled at power-on. A "1"means the bits are  
disabled at power-on; a "0"means the bits remain enabled at power-on.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*RCL < state number>  
Recall stored state. Recalls a stored state from memory and configures the  
instrument to that state. States are stored using the *SAV command.  
Example  
OUTPUT 70900;"*RCL 4"  
Recalls instrument state  
number 4  
*RMC < name_string>  
Remove Individual Macro Command. Purges an individual macro identified by  
the name_string parameter.  
Example  
output 70900;"*RMC ’LIST’"  
remove macro command from  
*DMC example  
NOTE: At printing time, *RMC is a command proposed for a revision and  
re-designation of ANSI/IEEE Std 488.2-1987.  
*RST Reset. Resets an instrument as follows:  
Sets the instrument to a known state (usually the power-on state)  
Aborts all pending operations  
Disables the *OPC and *OPC? modes.  
*RST does not affect:  
The state of the GPIB interface  
The GPIB address  
The output queue  
The Service Request Enable Register  
The Standard Event Status Enable Register  
The power-on flag  
Calibration data  
Protected user data  
*SAV < state number>  
Store state. Stores an instruments present state in a numbered memory location  
(< state number> parameter). State numbers can range from 0 to 9.  
Example  
OUTPUT 70900;"*SAV 4"  
Saves present instrument state  
as state number 4  
*SRE < mask>  
Service Request Enable. When a service request event occurs, it sets a  
corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register (this happens whether or not the  
event has been enabled (unmasked) by *SRE). The *SRE command allows you  
to identify which of these events will assert an GPIB service request (SRQ).  
When an event is enabled by *SRE and that event occurs, it sets a bit in the  
Status Byte Register and issues an SRQ to the computer (sets the GPIB SRQ  
line true). You enable an event by specifying its decimal weight for < mask> .  
To enable more than one event, specify the sum of the decimal weights. Refer to  
"The Status Byte Register"earlier in this chapter for a table showing the  
contents of the Status Byte Register.  
Example  
OUTPUT 70900;"*SRE 160"  
Enables bits 5 & 7. Respective  
weights are 32 + 128 = 160  
7-70 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*SRE? Status Register Enable Query. Returns the weighted sum of all enabled  
(unmasked) events (those enabled to assert SRQ) in the Status Byte Register.  
Example  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*SRE?"  
Sends Status Register Enable  
query  
20 ENTER 70900;A  
30 PRINT A  
Places response in variable  
Prints response  
40 END  
*STB? Status Byte Register Query. Returns the weighted sum of all set bits in the Status  
Byte Register. Refer to "The Status Byte Register"earlier in this chapter for a  
table showing the contents of the Status Byte Register.  
Comments You can read the Status Byte Register using either the *STB? command or an  
GPIB serial poll (IEEE 488.1 message). Both methods return the weighted sum  
of all set bits in the register. The difference between the two methods is that  
*STB? does not clear bit 6 (Service Request); serial poll does clear bit 6. No  
other status byte register bits are cleared by either method with the exception of  
the Message Available bit (bit 4) which may be cleared as a result of reading the  
response to *STB?.  
Example  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*STB?"  
Sends Status Byte Register  
query  
20 ENTER 70900;A  
30 PRINT A  
Places response in variable  
Prints response  
40 END  
*TRG Trigger. Triggers an instrument when the trigger source is set to bus  
(TRIG:SOUR BUS command) and the instrument is in the Wait for Trigger  
state.  
*TST? Self-Test. Causes an instrument to execute an internal self-test and returns a  
response showing the results of the self-test. A zero response indicates that  
self-test passed. A value other than zero indicates a self-test failure or error.  
Example  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"*TST?"  
20 ENTER 70900;A  
Execute self-test, return  
response  
Places self-test response in  
variable  
30 PRINT A  
40 END  
Prints response  
*WAI Wait-to-continue. Prevents an instrument from executing another command  
until the operation caused by the previous command is finished (sequential  
operation). Since all instruments normally perform sequential operations,  
executing the *WAI command causes no change to the instruments operation.  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
GPIB Message  
Reference  
This section describes IEEE-488.1 defined messages and their affect on  
instruments installed in the mainframe. The examples shown are specifically for  
HP 9000 Series 200/300 computers using BASIC language. Any IEEE-488  
controller can send these messages; however, the syntax may be different from  
that shown here.  
Go To Local (GTL)  
Places an instrument in local state.  
Comments  
Refer to the Local Lockout message, later in this chapter, for information  
on how GTL affects front panel lockout.  
Examples  
LOCAL 7  
Sets GPIB remote enable line  
false (all instruments go to  
local). (You must now execute  
REMOTE 7 to return to remote  
mode).  
LOCAL 70900  
Issues GPIB GTL to System  
Instrument. (The instrument  
will return to remote mode  
when it is listen addressed.)  
Group Execute Trigger Executing a group execute trigger will trigger an instrument assuming the  
following conditions are true:  
(GET)  
The instruments trigger source is set to Bus (TRIG:SOUR BUS  
command), and:  
The instrument is in the Wait For Trigger state, and:  
The instrument is addressed to listen (can be done by sending any  
command, the REMOTE 709ss (ss = secondary address) command, or  
with the LISTEN command).  
Comments  
Example  
For instruments in an Agilent E1300B/E1301B Mainframe, only one  
instrument at a time can be programmed to respond to GET. This is  
because only one instrument can be addressed to listen at any one time.  
10 OUTPUT 70900;"TRIG:SOUR BUS" Sets trigger source to bus  
20 OUTPUT 70900;"INIT:IMM"  
Places System Instruments  
Pacer in Wait For Trigger state  
30 TRIGGER 70900  
40 END  
T riggers Pacer  
Interface Clear (IFC)  
Unaddresses all instruments in the mainframe and breaks any bus handshaking  
in progress.  
Example  
ABORT 7  
7-72 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Device Clear (DCL) or DCL clears all instruments in the mainframe. SDC clears a specific instrument.  
The purpose of DCL or SDC is to prepare one or more instruments to receive  
and execute commands (usually *RST). DCL or SDC do the following to each  
instrument:  
Selected Device Clear  
(SDC)  
Clear the input buffer and output queue.  
Reset the command parser.  
Disable any operation that would prevent *RST from being executed.  
Disable the Operation Complete and Operation Complete Query modes.  
DCL or SDC do not affect:  
Any settings or stored data in the instrument (except the Operation  
Complete and Operation Complete Query modes)  
Front panel operation  
Any instrument operation in progress (except as stated above)  
The status byte (except for clearing the Message Available bit as a result  
of clearing the output queue).  
Examples  
CLEAR 7  
Clears all instruments  
CLEAR 70900  
Clears the System Instrument  
Local Lockout (LLO)  
When an instrument is in remote mode, Local Lockout prevents an instrument  
from being operated from the mainframes front panel.  
Comments  
Certain front panel operations such as menu control and display scrolling  
are still active in Local Lockout mode.  
If the instrument is in the local state when you send LOCAL LOCKOUT,  
it remains in local. If the instrument is in the remote state when you send  
LOCAL LOCKOUT, front panel control is disabled immediately for that  
instrument.  
After executing LOCAL LOCKOUT, you can enable the keyboard by  
sending the LOCAL 7 command or by cycling power. The LOCAL 709ss  
(ss = secondary address) command enables the front panel for that  
instrument but a subsequent remote command disables it. Sending the  
LOCAL 7 command removes lockout for all instruments and places them  
in the local state.  
Examples  
10 REMOTE 70900  
Sets the System Instrument  
remote state  
20 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7  
Disables front panel control for  
the System Instrument and all  
other instruments that were in  
the remote state.  
30 END  
System Instrument Command Reference 7-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Sets the GPIB remote enable line (REN) true which places an instrument in the  
remote state.  
Comments  
The REMOTE 709ss (ss = secondary address) command places the  
instrument in the remote state. The REMOTE 7 command, does not, by  
itself, place the instrument in the remote state. After sending the  
REMOTE 7 command, the instrument will only go into the remote state  
when it receives its listen address.  
In most cases, you will only need the REMOTE command after using the  
LOCAL command. REMOTE is independent of any other GPIB activity  
and toggles a single bus line called REN. Most controllers set the REN  
line true when power is applied or when reset.  
Examples  
REMOTE 7  
Sets GPIB REN line true  
REMOTE 70900  
Sets REN line true and  
addresses System Instrument  
Serial Poll (SPOLL)  
The SPOLL command, like the *STB? Common Command, returns the  
weighted sum of all set bits in an instruments Status Register (status byte).  
Refer to "The Status Register"earlier in this chapter for a table showing the  
contents of the Status Register.  
Comments  
Examples  
The SPOLL command differs from the *STB? command in that SPOLL  
clears bit 6 (RQS). Executing *STB? does not clear bit 6.  
10 P= SPOLL (70900)  
Sends Serial Poll, places  
response into P  
20 DISP P  
30 END  
Displays response  
7-74 System Instrument Command Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Instrument  
1
Command Quick  
Reference  
The following tables summarize SCPI and IEEE 488.2 Common (*) commands  
for the Agilent E1300/E1031 Mainframe System Instrument.  
SCPI Commands Quick Reference  
Description  
Command  
ABORt  
[IMMediate]  
Abort Pacer output.  
DIAGnostic  
:BOOT  
:COLD  
Restarts System processor, clears stored configurations.  
Same as cycling power.  
[:WARM]  
:COMMunicate  
:SERial[0]  
[:OWNer] [SYSTem| IBASic| NONE]  
Allocates the built-in serial interface.  
Returns SYST, IBAS, or NONE.  
[:OWNer]?  
:SERial[n]  
:STORe  
Stores serial communication parameters into non-volatile storage.  
:DOWNload  
:CHECked  
[:MADDress]  
Write data to non-volatile user RAM starting at the specified address  
using error correction.  
:SADDress  
Write data to non-volatile user RAM at the specified address using  
error correction.  
[:MADDress] < address> , < data>  
:SADDress < address> , < data>  
:DRAM  
Write data to non-volatile user RAM starting at the specified address.  
Write data to non-volatile user RAM at the specified address.  
:AVAilable?  
Returns the amount of RAM remaining in the DRAM (Driver RAM)  
segment.  
:CREate < size> ,< num_drivers>  
Creates a non-volatile RAM area for loading instrument drivers.  
:DRIVer  
:LOAD < driver_block>  
Loads the instrument driver contained in the specified driver_block  
into a previously created DRAM segment.  
:LOAD  
:CHECked  
Loads the instrument driver contained in the specified driver_block  
into a previously created DRAM segment using error correction.  
:LIST  
[:ALL]  
:RAM  
:ROM  
Lists all drivers from all driver tables (RAM and ROM)  
Lists all drivers found in the RAM driver table.  
Lists all drivers found in the ROM driver table.  
:INTerrupt  
:ACTivate [ON| OFF| 1| 0]  
:SETup[n] [ON| OFF| 0| 1]  
Enable VXIbus interrupt acknowledgement.  
Enables or disables System Instrument control of VXI  
interrupt line [n].  
:SETup[n]?  
Returns current state of SETup[n].  
:PRIority[n] [< priority> | MIN| MAX| DEF]  
:PRIority[n]? [MIN| MAX| DEF]  
:RESPonse?  
Specifies the priority level of VXI interrupt line [n].  
Returns priority level of VXI interrupt line [n].  
Returns response from the highest priority interrupt line.  
Command Quick Reference 7–75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Instrument  
SCPI Commands Quick Reference  
Description  
Command  
:NRAM  
:ADDRess?  
Returns starting address of the User non-volatile RAM.  
:CREate < size> | MIN| MAX  
Creates a User non-volatile RAM segment.  
Returns the current or allowable size of User NVRAM.  
Returns an 8, 16, or 32 bit value from memory.  
Stores an 8, 16, or 32 bit value to RAM.  
:CREate? [MIN| MAX]  
:PEEK? < address> | MIN| MAX,< width>  
:POKE < address> | MIN| MAX,< width> ,< data>  
:RDISk  
:ADDRess?  
Returns the starting address of an IBASIC RAM volume.  
Allocates RAM for an IBASIC RAM volume.  
:CREate < size> | MIN| MAX  
:CREate? [MIN| MAX]  
Returns the current or allowable size of the RAM vol.  
:UPLoad  
[:MADDress]? < address> ,< byte_count>  
:SADDress? < address> , < byte_count>  
Returns data from non-volatile user RAM starting at address.  
Returns data from non-volatile user RAM at address.  
INITiate  
[:Immediate]  
Enables trigger system to start Pacer.  
[SOURce]  
:PULSe  
COUNt < numberic value>  
Sets number of Pacer pulses per trigger.  
Returns current count, or MIN| MAX allowed value.  
Sets Pacer pulse period in seconds.  
COUNt? [MIN| MAX]  
:PERiod < numeric value  
:PERiod? [MIN\ MAX]  
Returns the current or allowable period value.  
STATus  
:OPERation  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle 256  
:ENABle?  
Returns the state of the condition register.  
Set Standard Operation Enable Register mask.  
Returns value of enable mask.  
[:EVENt]?  
Returns value of the bit set in the Event register (Standard Operation  
Status Group).  
:PRESet  
:QUEStionable  
:CONDition?  
Presets status registers  
Always returns + 0.  
:ENABle < mask>  
:ENABle?  
Set Questionable Status Register enable mask.  
Returns value of enable mask.  
Always returns + 0.  
[:EVENt]?  
7–76 Command Quick Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Instrument  
SCPI Commands Quick Reference  
Description  
Command  
SYSTem  
:BEEPer  
[:IMMediate]  
:COMMunicate  
:GPIB  
Sound beeper (fixed duration and tone).  
:ADDRess  
:ADDRess?  
Sets the primary address of the communications port.  
Returns GPIB address or min| max allowed value.  
:SERial[n]  
:CONTrol  
:DTR ON| OFF| STANdard| IBFull  
Sets mode for modem control line DTR.  
Returns current mode of DTR line.  
Sets mode for modem control line RTS.  
Returns current mode of RTS line.  
:DTR?  
:RTS ON| OFF| STANdard| IBFull  
:RTS?  
[:RECeive]  
:BAUD < baud_rate> | MIN| MAX  
:BAUD? [MIN| MAX]  
:BITS 7| 8| MIN| MAX  
:BITS? [MIN| MAX]  
:PACE  
Sets transmit and receive baud rate of serial interface.  
Returns the current or allowable baud setting.  
Sets the number of data bits in the serial data frame.  
Returns the current or allowable BITS setting.  
[:PROTocol] XON| NONE  
[:PROTocol]?  
Sets the receive pacing protocol to XON/XOFF or none.  
Returns the state of receive pacing protocol.  
:THReshold  
:STARt < char_count>  
:STARt? [MIN| MAX]  
:STOP < char_count>  
:STOP? [MIN| MAX]  
:PARity  
Sets the input buffer start threshold for input pacing.  
Returns current or allowable STARt threshold level.  
Sets the input buffer stop threshold for input pacing.  
Returns the current or allowable STOP threshold level.  
:CHECk 1| 0| ON| OFF  
:CHECk?  
Enables/disables receive parity checking.  
Returns the current state of receive parity checking.  
Sets the type of receive and transmit parity.  
[:TYPe] EVEN| ODD| ZERO|  
ONE| NONE  
[:TYPe]?  
Returns the current parity type setting.  
:SBITs 1| 2| MIN| MAX  
:SBITs? MIN| MAX  
Sets the number of stop bits for receive and transmit.  
Returns the number of stop bits set.  
:TRANsmit  
Note: Agilent E1324A is always TRAN:AUTO ON  
Links/unlinks the transmit and receive pacing protocol.  
Returns the current transmit/receive pacing linkage.  
:AUTO 1| 0| ON| OFF  
:AUTO?  
:PACE  
[:PROTocol] XON| NONE  
[:PROTocol]?  
Sets the transmit pacing protocol to XON/XOFF or none.  
Returns the state of transmit pacing protocol.  
Sets system calendar.  
:DATE < year> ,< month> ,< day>  
:DATE? [MIN| MAX,MIN| MAX,MIN| MAX]  
:ERRor?  
Returns current date or min| max allowable values.  
Returns oldest error message in Error Queue.  
Sets the system clock.  
:TIME < hour> ,< minute> ,< second>  
:TIME? [MIN| MAX,MIN| MAX,MIN| MAX]  
:VERSion?  
Returns current time or min| max allowable values.  
Returns SCPI version for which this istrument complies.  
Command Quick Reference 7–77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Instrument  
SCPI Commands Quick Reference  
Description  
Command  
TRIGger  
:DELay < numeric value>  
Sets delay between trigger and first Pacer pulse.  
:DELAy? [MIN| MAX]  
[:IMMediate]  
Returns current trigger delay or MIN| MAX allowable value.  
Sets trigger source for timer/pacer.  
:SLOPe [NEGATIVE]  
:SLOPe?  
For compatibility only. Accepts only NEGATIVE.  
Returns the string NEG.  
:SOURce EXTernal| IMMediate| BUS| HOLD  
:SOURce?  
Trigger source is GET or *TRIG.  
Returns current trigger source.  
VXI  
:CONFigure  
:DeviceLADd?  
:DeviceLISt?  
Returns a list of the logical addresses in the system.  
Returns information about one or all installed devices.  
Returns the number of installed devices.  
:DeviceNUMber?  
:INFormation  
Gets the static information about the selected logical address (see  
VXI:SELect).  
:ALL?  
Gets the static information about all logical addresses.  
:HIERarchy  
Gets the current hierarchy configuration data for the selected logical  
address (see VXI:SELect)  
:ALL?  
Gets the current hierarchy configuration data for all logical addresses.  
:NUMber?  
Gets the number of devices in the system when issued to a Resource  
Manager.  
:LADDress?  
Gets a comma separated list of all logical addresses of devices in the  
system when issued to a Resource Manager.  
:READ? < logical_addr> ,< register_num>  
:REGister  
Read the contents of the device register at register_num.  
:READ? < numeric_value| < reg_name>  
Returns the contents of the specified 16 bit register at the selected  
logical address (see VXI:SELect).  
:WRITe < numeric_value| < reg_name> ,< data>  
Writes to the specified 16 bit register at the selected logical address  
(see VXI:SELect).  
:RESet?  
Resets the device at the selected logical address (see VXI:SELect).  
:SELect < numeric_value>  
Specifies the logical address to be used by all subsequent commands  
in the VXI subsystem.  
:WRITe < logical_addr> ,< register_num> ,< data>  
Write data to the device register at logical_addr.  
7–78 Command Quick Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Instrument  
IEEE 488.2 Comman Commands Quick Reference  
Category  
General  
Command  
Title  
*IDN?  
Identification Query  
*RST  
Reset Command  
Self Test Query  
*TST?  
*CLS  
Clear Status Command  
Instrument Status  
*ESE < mask>  
*ESE?  
Standard Event Status Enable Register Command  
Standard Event Status Enable Query  
Standard Event Status Register Query  
Power-on Status Clear Command  
Power-on Status Clear Query  
*ESR?  
*PSC < flag>  
*PSC?  
*SRE < mask>  
*SRE?  
Service Request Enable Command  
Service Request Enable Query  
*STB?  
Status Byte Register Query  
*DMC < name> ,< cmd_data>  
Define Macro Command  
Macros  
*EMC < enable>  
*EMC?  
Enable Macro Command  
Enable Macro Query  
*GMC? < name>  
*LMC?  
Get Macro Query  
Learn Macro Query  
*PMC  
Purge all Macros Command  
Remove individual Macro Command  
*RMC < name>  
*OPC  
Operation Complete Command  
Synchronization  
*OPC?  
*WAI  
Operation Complete Query  
Wait-to-Continue Command  
Command Quick Reference 7–79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7–80 Command Quick Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
Mainframe  
Specifications  
Pacer (50% duty cycle): Programmable intervals: 500 nsec to 8.389 sec with 500 nsec resolution.  
Accuracy:  
First pulse after trigger: 0.01% of programmed time + 600 to 850 nsec.  
Additional pulses: 0.01% of programmed time ± 50 nsec.  
Number of pulses: 1 through 8388607 or continous.  
Drive capability:  
VLO 0.75 V @ 4 mA  
VHI 3.4 V @ -4 mA  
Rise Time/Fall Time: 320 nsec/90 nsec.  
Real-time Clock: Accuracy: 0.01% of elapsed time since last sset ± 1 sec @ 25° C.  
Temperature variation: ± 0.01% of elapsed time since last set, over full  
temperature range.  
Resolution: 1 sec.  
Non-volatile lifetime: 60 days without additional RAM.  
Battery life: 1 year typical, NiCd battery.  
Trigger Input: TTL compatible, minimum pulse width 300 nsec.  
Non-volatile added Non-volatile added storage is backed up by NiCd battery. The table below shows  
minimum and typical lifetimes, which varry according to the amount of memory  
installed.  
memory storage  
lifetime:  
RAM (MBytes)  
MIN Lifetime (hours)  
Typical lifetime (days)  
0.5  
1.0  
1.5  
2.0  
240  
130  
90  
320  
180  
120  
90  
72  
Slots: 7 B-size and 3 A-size  
EMC, RFI, Safety: See Declaration of Conformity.  
Specifications A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Size:  
inches  
6.97  
7.44  
16.75  
20.1  
22.38  
mm  
177  
189  
426  
510  
569  
Height without feet  
Height with feet  
Width  
Depth  
Depth with terminal blocks  
Weight:  
E1300B  
7.4 kg  
E1301B  
7.8 kg  
Net  
Max per modules  
1.3 kg  
1.3 kg  
Power: Line voltage:  
115 or 230 Vac @ 50 to 400 Hz  
3 A @ 115 Vac  
Fused at:  
1.5 A @ 230 Vac  
Consumption: E1300B (empty) 27 W, 52 VA  
E1301B (empty) 31 W, 57 VA  
Any combination of Agilent Series B modules can be powered and cooled by the  
Agilent 75000 Series B mainframe. Configuration using non-Agilent modules  
(e.g., VME modules) should be checked to assure the power consumption does  
not exceed 12.25 A on + 5 V, 4.65 A on + 12 V, and 0.95 A on -12 V supplies.  
The Agilent 75000 Series B mainframe will provide ample cooling for  
configurations that stay within these limits.  
Cooling: 25 Watts / Slot (with 10° rise in temperature)  
Note: Agilent Series B mainframes provide VXIbus connector P1. Modules may  
not be masters.  
Humidity: 65% 0° to 40° C  
Operating temperature: 0° to 55° C  
Storage temperature: -40° to 75° C  
Battery: The internal battery consists of a 6.3V NiCd battery pack.  
Altitude: The instrument may be operated at a maximum altitude of 3000 meters.  
Installation Category:  
2
A-2 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCPI Conformance  
Information  
The Agilent E1300/1301B conforms to SCPI-1990.0  
In documentation produced prior to June 1990, these SCPI commands are  
labeled as TMSL commands.  
The following tables list all the SCPI conforming, approved, and non-SCPI  
commands that the E1300/1301B can execute. Individual commands may not  
execute without having the proper plug-in module installed in the E1300/  
13301B. Each plug-in module manual describes the commands that apply to that  
module.  
Switchbox The following Agilent plug-in modules can be configured as switchbox modules.  
Refer to the individual plug-in Users Manual for configuration information.  
Configuration  
E1345A  
E1346A  
E1347A  
E1351A  
E1352A  
E1353A  
E1357A  
E1358A  
E1361A  
E1364A  
E1366A  
E1367A  
E1368A  
E1369A  
E1370A  
Table A-1. Switchbox SCPI-1990.0 Confirmed Commands  
ABORt  
ARM  
STATus  
:QUEStionable  
:CONDition?  
:COUNt  
[:EVENt]?  
:ENABle  
INITiate  
:ENABle?  
[:IMMediate]  
:CONTinous  
:OPERation  
:CONDition?  
[:EVENt]?  
:ENABle  
OUTPut  
:ECLTrg  
[:STATe]  
:TTLTrg  
[:STATe]  
:ENABle?  
:PRESet  
SYSTem  
:ERRor?  
:CPON  
[ROUTe]  
:OPEN  
:OPEN?  
:CLOSe  
:CLOSe?  
:SCAN  
:CTYPe?  
:VERSion?  
TRIGger  
[:IMMediate]  
:SOURce  
:SLOPe  
Table A-2. Switchbox Non-SCPI Commands  
DISPlay  
:MONitor  
[:STATe]  
:CARD  
[ROUTe]  
:SCAN  
[:LIST]  
:MODE  
:PORT  
SYSTem  
:CDEScription?  
:SETTling  
[:TIME]  
:TIME?  
Specifications A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multimeter Commands The following tables apply to the Agilent E1326A and E1326B.  
Table A-3. Multimeter SCPI-1990.0 Confirmed Commands  
ABORt  
[SENSe]  
:FUNCtion  
CALibration  
:ZERO  
:FUNCtion?  
:RESistance  
:AUTO  
:AUTO?  
:VALue  
:APERture  
:APERture?  
:RANGe  
:AUTO  
CONFigure  
:AUTO?  
:FRESistance  
:RESistance  
:TEMPerature  
:VOLTage  
:AC  
:RANGe?  
:RESolution  
:RESolution?  
:VOLTage  
:AC  
[:DC]  
:RANGe  
:RANGe?  
CONFigure?  
[:DC]  
:RANGe  
FETCh?  
FORMat  
:AUTO  
:AUTO?  
:RANGe?  
[:DATA]  
:RESolution  
:RESolution?  
INITiate  
[:IMMediate]  
STATus  
:QUEStionable  
:CONDition?  
MEASure  
:FRESistance?  
[:EVENt]?  
:RESistance?  
:TEMPerature?  
:VOLTage  
:AC?  
:ENABle  
:ENABle?  
:OPERation  
CONDition?  
[:EVENt]?  
:ENABle  
[:DC]?  
READ?  
:ENABle?  
:PREset  
SYSTem  
:ERRor?  
:CTYPe?  
:VERsion?  
TRIGger  
:COUNt  
:COUNt?  
:DELay?  
:AUTO  
:AUTO?  
:DELay?  
[:IMMediate]  
:SOURce  
:SOURce?  
Table A-4. Multimeter SCPI Approved (not confirmed) Commands  
[SENSe]  
:RESistance  
:NPLC  
:NPLC?  
:VOLtage  
:NPLC  
:NPLC?  
A-4 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table A-5. Multimeter Non-SCPI Commands  
CALibration  
:LFRequency  
:LFRequency?  
:STRain  
MEMory  
:VME  
:ADDRess  
:ADDRess?  
:SIZE  
CONFigure  
:STRain  
:QUARter  
:SIZE?  
:STATe  
:STATe?  
:HBENding  
:HPOisson  
:FBENding  
:FPOisson  
[ROUTe]  
:FUNCtion  
:FBPoisson  
:QTENsion  
:QCOMpression  
:UNSTrained  
SAMPle  
:COUNt  
:COUNt?  
:SOURce  
:SOURce?  
:TIMer  
DISPlay  
:MONitor  
:TIMer?  
:CHANnel  
:CHANnel?  
[:STATe]  
[SENSe]  
:RESsitance  
:OCOMpensated  
:OCOmpensated?  
:STRain  
[:STATe]?  
MEASure  
:STRain  
:GFACtor  
:POISson  
:QUARter?  
:HBENding?  
:HPOisson?  
:FBENding?  
:FPOisson?  
:UNSTrained  
SYSTem  
:CDEScription  
:FBPoisson?  
:QTENsion?  
:QCOMpression?  
:UNSTrained?  
Specifications A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Counter Commands The following tables apply to the Agilent E1332A 4 Chanel Counter/Totalizer  
and the Agilent E1333A 3 Channel Universal Counter.  
Table A-6. Agilent E1332A SCPI-1990.0 Confirmed Commands  
ABORt  
READ?  
CONFigure  
[SENSe]  
:FREQuency  
:FUNCtion  
:FREQuency  
:PERiod  
:FREQuency  
:APERture  
:APERture?  
:PERiod  
:PWIDth  
:NWIDth  
CONFigure?  
FETCh?  
FORMat  
STATus  
:QUEStionable  
[:EVENt]?  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle  
[:DATA]  
INITiate  
[:IMMediate]  
:ENABle?  
:OPERation  
[:EVENt]?  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle  
INPut  
:FILTer  
[:LPASs]  
[:STATe]  
:ENABle?  
:PREset  
[:STATe]?  
:FREQuency  
:FREQuency?  
SYSTEM  
:ERRor?  
:VERSion?  
MEASure  
:FREQuency?  
TRIGger  
:PERiod?  
:PWIDth?  
:NWIDth  
[:IMMediate]  
:SOURCe  
:SOURCe?  
Table A-7. Agilent E1332A Non-SCPI Commands  
CONF[< channel> ]  
[SENSe[< channel> ]]  
:PERiod  
:TOTalize  
:TINTerval  
:UDCount  
:NPERiods  
:NPERiods?  
:TOTalize  
DISPlay  
:MONitor  
:CHANnel  
:GATE  
[:STATe]  
[:STATe]?  
:POLarity  
:POLarity?  
:CHANnel?  
[:STATe]  
[:STATe]?  
:EVENt  
:LEVel  
INPut  
:LEVel?  
:SLOPe  
:SLOPe?  
:ISOLate  
:ISOLate?  
MEASure[< channel> ]  
:TINTerval?>  
A-6 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table A-8. Agilent E1333A SCPI-1990.0 Confirmed Commands  
ABORt  
READ?  
FETCh?  
[SENSe]  
:FUNCtion  
:FREQuency  
:PERiod  
:FREQuency  
:APERture  
:APERture?  
CONFigure  
:FREQuency  
:PERiod  
:PWIDth  
:NWIDth  
CONFigure?  
STATus  
:QUEStionable  
FORMat  
[:DATA]  
:[EVENt]?  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle  
INITiate  
[:IMMediate]  
:ENABle?  
:OPERation  
[:EVENt]?  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle  
INPut  
:ATTenuation  
:ATTenuation?  
:COUPling  
:COUPling?  
:FILTer  
:ENABle?  
:PREset  
SYSTem  
:ERRor?  
:VERSion?  
[:LPASs]  
[:STATe]  
[:STATe]?  
:IMPedance  
:IMPedance?  
TRIGger  
[:IMMediate]  
:SOURCe  
MEASure  
:FREQuency?  
:SOURCe?  
:PERiod?  
:PWIDth?  
:NWIDth?  
Table A-9. Agilent E1333A Non-SCPI Commands  
CONF[< channel> ]  
[SENSe[< channel> ]]  
:PERiod  
:TOTalize  
:TINTerval  
:RATio  
:NPERiods  
:NPERiods?  
:RATio  
DISPlay  
:MONitor  
:CHANnel  
:NPERiods  
:NPERiods?  
:TINTerval  
:NPERiods  
:NPERiods?  
:EVENt  
:CHANnel?  
[:STATe]  
[:STATe]?  
:LEVel  
MEASure[< channel> ]  
:TINTerval?  
:LEVel?  
:SLOPe  
:RATio?  
:SLOPe?  
Specifications A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D/A Converter The following tables apply to the Agilent E1328A 4 Channel D/A Converter.  
Commands  
Table A-10. Agilent E1328A SCPI-1990.0 Confirmed Commands  
CALibration  
:STATe  
STATus  
:QUEStionable  
:CONDition?  
:STATe?  
[:EVENt]?  
SYSTem  
:ERRor?  
:VERSion?  
:ENABle  
:ENABle?  
:OPERation  
:CONDition?  
[:EVENt]?  
:ENABle  
:ENABle?  
Table A-11. Agilent E1328A Non-SCPI Commands  
CALibration  
:VOLTage  
:CURRent  
SOURce  
:VOLTage< channel>  
:VOLTage< channel> ?  
:CURRent< channel>  
:CURRent< channel> ?  
:FUNCtion< channel> ?  
DISPlay  
:MONitor  
:CHANnel  
:CHANnel?  
[:STATe]  
:STRing?  
A-8 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital I/O Commands The following tables apply to the Agilent E1330A Quad 8-bit Digital I/O  
Module.  
Table A-12. Agilent E1330A SCPI-1990.0 Confirmed Commands  
STATus  
:QUEStionable  
:CONDition?  
SYSTem  
:ERRor?  
:VERSion?  
[:EVENt]?  
:ENABle  
:ENABle?  
:OPERation  
:CONDition?  
[:EVENt]?  
:ENABle  
:ENABle?  
:PREset  
Table A-13. Agilent E1330A Non-SCPI Commands  
DISPlay  
:MONitor  
[:STATe]  
[SOURce]  
:DIGital  
:TRACe  
:CATalog  
:PORT  
:PORT?  
:STRing?  
[:DATA]  
[:DATA]?  
:DEFine  
:DELete  
MEASure  
:DIGital  
:CONTrol< port>  
:POLarity  
:DATA< port> ?  
:BIT< number> ?  
:POLarity?  
:BLOCk?  
[:VALue]  
:FLAG< port> ?  
:DATA< port>  
[:VALue]  
MEMory  
:BIT< number>  
:DELete  
:TRACe  
MACRo  
:HANDshake  
:DELay  
:VME  
:ADDRess  
:ADDRess?  
:SIZE  
[:MODE]  
[:MODE]?  
:POLarity  
:POLarity?  
:SIZE?  
:STATe  
:FLAG< port>  
:STATe?  
:POLarity  
:POLarity?  
:HANDshake< port>  
:DELay  
[:MODE]  
[:MODE]?  
Specifications A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Instrument  
Commands  
Table A-14. System Instrument SCPI-1990.0 Confirmed Commands  
ABORt  
SYSTem  
:BEEPer  
[:IMMediate]  
INITiate  
[:IMMediate]  
:COMMunicate  
:GPIB  
[SOURce]  
:ADDRess  
:ADDRess?  
:SERial  
[:RECeive]  
:BAUD  
:PULSe  
:COUNt  
:COUNt?  
:PERiod  
:PERiod?  
:BAUD?  
:BITS  
STATus  
:BITS?  
:PARity  
:QUEStionable  
:CONDition?  
[:TYPE]  
[:EVENt]?  
:ENABle  
:ENABle?  
[:TYPE]?  
:CHECk  
:CHECk?  
:OPERation  
:SBITS  
:SBITS?  
:TRANsmit  
:CONDition?  
[:EVENt]?  
:ENABle  
:AUTO  
:ENABle?  
:AUTO?  
:PREset  
:ERRor?  
:TIME  
TRIGger  
:TIME?  
:DATE  
:DATE?  
:VERSion?  
[:IMMediate]  
:SOURce  
:SOURce?  
:SLOPe  
VXI  
:SLOPe?  
:CONFigure  
:DNUMBer?  
Table A-15. System Instrument SCPI-1991.0 Confirmed Commands  
SYSTem  
:COMMunicate  
:SERial  
[:RECeive]  
:PACE  
[:PROTocol]  
SYSTem  
:COMMunicate  
:SERial  
:TRANsmit  
:PACE  
[:PROTocol]  
[:PROTocol]?  
[:PROTocol]?  
:THReshold  
:STARt  
:CONTrol  
:RTS  
:STARt?  
:RTS?  
:STOP  
:DTR  
:STOP?  
:DTR?  
Table A-16. System Instrument SCPI-1992.0 Approved Commands  
VXI  
:SELect  
:CONFigure  
:INFormation  
:ALL  
:HEIRarchy  
:ALL  
:LADDress?  
:NUMBer?  
:REGister  
:READ?  
:WRITe  
:RESet?  
A-10 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table A-17. System Instrument Non-SCPI Commands  
DIAGnostic  
MEMory  
:DELete  
:MACRo  
:AUTstart  
:AUTostart?  
:CHECksum  
:COMMunicate  
:SERial  
TRIGger  
:DELay  
[:OWNer]  
[:MINimum]  
[:OWNer]?  
[:MINimum]?  
:BOOT  
:COLD  
[:WARM]  
:UPLoad?  
:DOWNload  
:INTerrupt  
:ACT  
VXI  
:CONFigure  
:DLADdress?  
:DEVICELADd?  
:DLIST?  
:DEVICELISt?  
:SETup(n)  
:DEVICENUMber?  
:SETup(n)?  
:PRIority(n)  
:PRIority(n)?  
:WAIT?  
:READ?  
:WRITe  
:JSR  
:CALL  
:DRIVer  
:LOAD  
:LISt?  
:DRAM  
:CREate  
:CREate?  
:AVAilable?  
:NRAM  
:CREate  
:CREate?  
:AVAilable?  
:RDISK  
:CREate  
:CREate?  
:ADDRess?  
:PEEK  
:POKE  
Table A-18. Common Commands SCPI-1990.0 Confirmed  
*IDN  
*RST  
*TST  
*CLS  
*ESE  
*ESE?  
*ESR  
*SRE  
*SRE?  
*STB  
*PSC  
*PSC?  
*RCL  
*SAV  
*TRG  
*DMC  
*GMC?  
*PMC  
*LMC?  
*EMC  
*EMC?  
*OPC  
*OPC?  
*WAI  
Specifications A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-12 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Error Messages  
Using This Appendix  
This appendix shows how to read an instruments error queue, discusses the  
types of command language-related error messages, and provides a table of all  
of the System Instruments error messages and their probable causes.  
Reading an Instruments Error Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Error Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Start-up Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
1
Reading an  
Instrument’s Error  
Queue  
Executing the SYST:ERR? command reads the oldest error message from the  
instruments error queue and erases that error from the error queue. The  
SYST:ERR? command returns response data in the form:  
< error number> ,"< error description string> ".  
Example error message; -113,"Undefined header"  
Positive error numbers are specific to an instrument. Negative error numbers  
are command language-related and discussed in the next section "Error  
Messages". Command language-related errors also set a corresponding bit in the  
Standard Event Status Register (refer to "Instrument Status"in Chapter 4 for  
more information).  
Example: Reading the Error This program reads all errors (one error at a time, oldest to newest) from the  
Queue  
System Instruments error queue. After reading each error, that error is  
automatically erased from the queue. When the error queue is empty, this  
program returns: + 0,"No error".  
10 OPTION BASE 1  
20 DIM Message$[256]  
30 REPEAT  
Create array for error m essage  
Repeat next 3 lines until error  
number = 0  
40  
50  
60  
OUTPUT 70900;"SYST:ERR?"  
Read error num ber & m essage  
Enter error num ber & m essage  
Print error num ber & m essage  
ENTER 70900;Code,Message$  
PRINT Code,Message$  
70 UNTIL Code= 0  
80 END  
Error Messages B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Error Types  
Negative error numbers are language-related and categorized as shown below.  
Positive error numbers are instrument specific and for the System Instrument  
are summarized in Table B-2. For other instruments, refer to their own users  
manual for a description of error messages.  
Table B-1. Negative Error Numbers  
Error Number  
-199 to -100  
-299 to -200  
-399 to -300  
-499 to -400  
Error Type  
Command Errors  
Execution Errors  
Device-Specific Errors  
Query Errors  
Command Errors A command error means the instrument cannot understand or execute the  
command. When a command error occurs, it sets the Command Error Bit  
(bit 5) in the Event Status Register. Command errors can be caused by:  
A syntax error was detected in a received command or message. Possible  
errors include a data element which violates the instruments listening  
formats or is of the wrong type (binary, numeric, etc.) for the instrument.  
An unrecognizable command header was received. Unrecognizable  
headers include incorrect SCPI headers and incorrect or unimplemented  
Common Commands.  
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) was entered into the input buffer inside  
of a Common Command.  
Execution Errors An execution error indicates the instrument is incapable of doing the action or  
operation requested by a command. When an execution error occurs, it sets the  
Execution Error Bit (bit 4) in the Event Status Register. Execution errors can be  
caused by the following:  
A parameter within a command is outside the limits or inconsistent with  
the capabilities of an instrument.  
A valid command could not be executed because of an instrument failure  
or other condition.  
Device-Specific Errors A device-specific error indicates an instrument operation did not complete,  
possibly due to an abnormal hardware or firmware condition (self-test failure,  
loss of calibration or configuration memory, etc.). When a device-specific error  
occurs, it sets the Device-Specific Error Bit (bit 3) in the Event Status Register.  
Query Errors A query error indicates a problem has occurred in the instruments output  
queue. When a query error occurs, it sets the Query Error Bit (bit 2) in the  
Event Status Register. Query errors can be caused by the following:  
An attempt was made to read the instruments output queue when no  
output was present or pending.  
Data in the instruments output queue has been lost for some reason.  
B-2 Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table B-2. Error Messages and Causes  
Error Messages and Causes  
Code  
Message  
Cause  
-101  
- 102  
Invalid character  
Unrecognized character in specified parameter.  
Command is missing a space or comma between  
parameters  
Syntax error  
- 103  
- 104  
Invalid separator  
Data type error  
Command parameter is separated by some  
character other than a comma.  
The wrong data type (i.e. number, character,  
string expression) was used when specifying a  
parameter.  
- 108  
- 109  
Parameter not allowed  
Missing parameter  
Parameter specified in a command which does  
not require one.  
No parameter specified in the command in  
which a parameter is required.  
- 113  
- 123  
Undefined header  
Numeric overflow  
Command header was incorrectly specified.  
A parameter specifies a value greater than the  
command allows.  
- 128  
- 131  
- 138  
- 141  
- 178  
- 211  
Numeric data not allowed  
Invalid suffix  
A number was specified for a parameter when a  
letter is required.  
Parameter suffix incorrectly specified  
(e.g. .5SECOND rather than .5S or .5SEC).  
Parameter suffix is specified when one is not  
allowed.  
The discrete parameter specified is not allowed  
(e.g. TRIG:SOUR INT - INT is not a choice.)  
A parameter other than the channel list is  
enclosed in parentheses.  
Trigger occurred while the Pacer is in the idle  
state, or a trigger occurred from a source other  
than the specified source.  
Suffix not allowed  
Invalid character data  
Expression data not allowed  
Trigger ignored  
- 222  
Data out of range  
The parameter value specified is too large or too  
small.  
- 224  
- 240  
Illegal parameter value  
Hardware error  
The numeric value specified is not allowed.  
Hardware error detected during power-on cycle.  
Return multimeter to Agilent for repair.  
If caused by *DMC, then macro memory is full.  
The error queue is full as more than 30 errors  
have occured.  
- 310  
- 350  
System error  
Too many errors  
- 410  
- 420  
Query interrupted  
Data is not read from the output buffer before  
another command is executed.  
Command which generates data not able to  
finish executing due to a multimeter  
configuration erorr.  
Query unterminated  
- 430  
Query deadlocked  
Command execution cannot continue since the  
mainframes command input, and data output  
buffers are full. Clearing the instrument restores  
control.  
1500  
2002  
2003  
External trigger source  
already allocated  
Invalid logical address  
"Event In" signal already allocated to another  
instrument such as a Switchbox.  
A value less than 0 or greater than 255 was  
specified for logical address.  
An odd address was specified for a 16 bit read or  
write. Always use even addresses for 16 bit  
(word) accesses.  
Invalid word address  
2005  
No card at logical address  
A non-existent logical address was specified with  
the VXI:READ? or VXI:WRITE command.  
VXI device failed its self test.  
Device type can not be combined into an  
instrument such as a scanning voltmeter or a  
switchbox.  
2101  
2102  
Failed Device  
Unable to combine device  
2103  
2105  
Config warning, Device  
driver not found  
Config error 5, A24 memory  
overflow  
ID of device does not match list of drivers  
available. Warning only.  
More A24 memory installed in the mainframe  
than can be configured into the available A24  
memory space.  
2108  
Config error 8, Inaccessible  
A24 memory  
A24 memory device overlaps memory space  
reserved by the mainframes operating system.  
Error Messages B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages and Causes  
Message  
Code  
Cause  
2110  
Config error 10, Insufficient  
system memory  
Too many instruments installed for the amount  
of RAM installed in the mainframe. Cannot  
configure instruments. Only the system  
instrument is started.  
2111  
2113  
Config error 11, Invalid  
instrument address  
A devices logical address is not a multiple of 8  
and the device is not part of a combined  
instrument.  
Duplicate logical addresses set or interrupt  
bypass switches set improperly. Only the system  
instrument is started.  
Config error 13, Logical  
address or IACK switch set  
wrong  
2129  
2130  
Config warning, Sysfail  
detected  
Config error 30, Pseudo  
instrument logical address  
unavailable  
A device was asserting SYSFAIL on the  
backplane during startup.  
A physical device has the same logical address as  
IBASIC (240)  
2131  
2145  
2148  
2202  
2809  
Config error 32, File system  
start up failed  
Config warning, Non-volatile NVRAM was corrupted or a cold boot was  
RAM contents lost executed.  
Config warning, Driver RAM Driver RAM was corrupted or a cold boot was  
Insufficient system resources to allow the  
IBASIC file system to start.  
contents lost  
executed.  
Unexpected interrupt from  
non-message based card  
Interrupt line has not been  
set up  
A register based card interrupted when an  
interrupt service routine had not been set up.  
A DIAG:INT:ACT or DIAG:INT:RESP  
command was executed before setting the  
interrupt with DIAG:INT:SET.  
B-4 Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Start-up Error  
Messages  
Start-up errors are most often generated just after the mainframe is powered-up  
or re-booted (DIAG:BOOT command). If you have an Agilent E1301B, or an  
Agilent E1300B with a terminal connected to the Display Terminal Interface  
(built-in RS-232 only), you can read these errors on the front panel or terminal.  
If you have an Agilent E1300B and no terminal, then you must access this error  
information by sending the VXI:CONF:DLIS? command over GPIB. We  
recommend that users of either model include a routine at the beginning if their  
application program which checks for start-up errors before the program trys to  
access individual instruments. See your Installation and Getting Started Guide  
for an example program.  
Table B-3. Start-up Error Messages and Warnings  
Start-Up Error Messages and Warnings  
Code  
Message  
Cause  
1
2
Failed Device  
Unable to combine device  
VXI device failed its self test.  
Device type can not be combined into an  
instrument such as a scanning voltmeter or a  
switchbox.  
3
5
Config warning, Device  
driver not found  
Config error 5, A24 memory  
overflow  
ID of device does not match list of drivers  
available. Warning only.  
More A24 memory installed in the mainframe  
than can be configured into the available A24  
memory space.  
8
Config error 8, Inaccessible  
A24 memory  
An A24 memory device overlaps a memory  
space reserved by the mainframes operating  
system.  
10  
Config error 10, Insufficient  
system memory  
Too many instruments installed for the amount  
of RAM installed in the mainframe. Cannot  
configure instruments. Only the system  
instrument is started.  
11  
13  
Config error 11, Invalid  
instrument address  
A devices logical address is not a multiple of 8  
and the device is not part of a combined  
instrument.  
Duplicate logical addresses set or interrupt  
bypass switches set improperly. Only the system  
instrument is started.  
Config error 13, Logical  
address or IACK switch set  
wrong  
29  
30  
Config warning, Sysfail  
detected  
Config error 30, Pseudo  
instrument logical address  
unavailable  
A device was asserting SYSFAIL on the  
backplane during startup.  
A physical device has the same logical address as  
IBASIC (240)  
31  
45  
48  
Config error 32, File system  
start up failed  
Config warning, Non-volatile NVRAM was corrupted or a cold boot was  
RAM contents lost executed.  
Config warning, Driver RAM Driver RAM was corrupted or a cold boot was  
contents lost executed.  
Insufficient system resources to allow the  
IBASIC file system to start.  
Error Messages B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-6 Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
Connecting and Configuring a  
Display Terminal  
Using this Appendix  
This appendix shows you how to configure the mainframe and a supported  
terminal to operate with the Display Terminal Interface. Using the Display  
Terminal Interface is discussed in Chapter 3.  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Connecting a Terminal to the Mainframe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Configuring a Terminal for the Mainframe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Configuring the Mainframe with Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
1
Overview  
The basic steps to configure a terminal to operate with the mainframe are:  
1. Choosing the proper cable to connect the terminal to the mainframe. The  
cable connects the appropriate data and control signals from the terminal  
to the mainframe.  
2. Configuring the terminals serial interface parameters to match those of  
the mainframe. The terminal and mainframe can only communicate with  
each other when they are using the same data rate, data word width,  
error checking scheme, and overall data frame width.  
3. Using the terminal interface menus to configure mainframes serial  
interface parameters. Once the terminal is communicating with the  
mainframe, the terminal can be used to adjust (if necessary) the  
mainframes serial interface parameters for best operation.  
1
Connecting a  
Terminal to the  
Mainframe  
The easiest way to connect the terminal to the mainframe is by using  
off-the-shelf cables which have been tested to work with your supported  
terminal. In the following figures you will find Agilent cables specified (by part  
number) for each of the supported terminals. If you plan to have the mainframe  
far from the terminal, you may need a custom built cable. The equivalent wiring  
diagram for each cable or cable combination is also provided.  
Connecting and Configuring a Display Terminal C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Agilent  
Agilent E1300B/E1301B  
Mainframe  
Agilent 10833A, B or C  
to Connect to GPIB  
Agilent  
Agilent E1300B/E1301B  
Mainframe  
Agilent  
Agilent  
Agilent E1300B/E1301B  
Mainframe  
Agilent 24542H  
Agilent 24542H  
Figure C–1 Connecting a Terminal to the Mainframe  
C-2 Connecting and Configuring a Display Terminal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Configuring a  
Terminal for the  
Mainframe  
Well first set the terminals serial communication parameters to match the  
mainframes default settings. If the mainframe is new and its factory default  
values are still set, the terminal will be ready to use. If the settings have been  
changed and you dont know what they are (Agilent E1300 with no front panel),  
you will restore them to their default values.  
Starting with Default The mainframe leaves the factory with these default serial communication  
settings:  
Mainframe Settings  
Baud rate; 9600  
Data word width; 8 bits  
Parity type; NONE  
Parity checking; OFF  
Number of stop bits; 1  
Pacing; XON (for both receive and transmit)  
DTR and RTS ON (signal level high)  
If your mainframe is new, or you know these default settings are still in effect  
you can go on to “Configuring the Terminal”. If you are unsure of the current  
settings, continue on with the following section “Restoring the Default  
Configuration”.  
Restoring the Default There is an easy way to restore the factory default settings. While the mainframe  
is performing its power-up self-test, the built-in serial interface always uses the  
Configuration  
factory default settings listed above. With your terminal set to the default  
settings, turn on the mainframe. While the mainframe is “Testing ROM”, press  
and hold the CTRL key and press the R key. The mainframe will reset its stored  
serial communication settings to the factory default values. It is important that  
you press CTRL-R duringthe “Testing ROM” portion of the self-test. The  
terminal should now display "Select an instrument".  
Note  
Restoring the default serial communication settings also clears both the User  
and System non-volatile RAM areas.  
Configuring the Using your terminal owners manual, set the terminals communication  
parameters to the values shown in the list above. For DTR and RTS, set your  
Terminal  
terminal to DTR or Hardware handshake OFF. In addition, make sure your  
terminal is configured to “Transmit Functions” or “Transmit Codes”. This  
means that when you press one of the editing keys (e.g. right arrow key) the  
terminal will send to the mainframe, the code which corresponds to the key. If  
this not set properly, the cursor will appear to respond to the keys, but the  
mainframe will not know that you moved the cursor.  
Connecting and Configuring a Display Terminal C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trying it Turn on the mainframe while watching the terminals display. After the  
mainframe finishes its self-test, the terminal should display "Select an  
instrument". If not, the mainframes communication parameters are not set to  
the default values. Go back to “Restoring the Default Configuration”.  
1
Configuring the  
Mainframe with  
Menus  
After you have your terminal communicating with your mainframe at the default  
settings you may want to change to settings which are better for your installation.  
You can make these changes to the serial interface configuration using the  
Display Terminal Interface menus. Several of the changes you can make using  
the menus will cause communication between the terminal and mainframe to be  
lost. You will have to match each change in the mainframe configuration with a  
corresponding change in your terminals configuration. Use the following  
procedure:  
1. Change the mainframe configuration (see the menu example on  
page C-5).  
2. Change the terminals configuration to match the change from step one.  
Repeat steps one and two for each desired configuration change.  
Any changes you make to the mainframe configuration are only temporary (lost  
when power is removed) until you put them into non-volatile storage. To store  
the current configuration, follow the menu example on page C-6.  
C-4 Connecting and Configuring a Display Terminal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Use the Serial Interface Menus  
Press READ to find out  
the current setting  
Press SET to change  
the current setting  
Each SET Menu will have  
two or more choices  
Enter Card Number press Return  
(0 for built-in, 1-7 for a plug-in)  
Read the BAUD rate  
Enter Card Number press Return  
(0 for built-in, 1-7 for a plug-in)  
The setting is now in volatile RAM storeage.  
See the “How to Store Interface Settings”  
Menu Chart for non-volatile storage which  
maintains settings through power cycles.  
Connecting and Configuring a Display Terminal C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Store the Serial Interface Configuration  
Enter Card Number press Return. Card Number 0 for  
built-in stores settings into non_volatile RAM. Card  
Number 1-7 for Agilent E1324A stores settings into its  
on- board EEROM)  
C-6 Connecting and Configuring a Display Terminal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Sending Binary Data Over RS-232  
About this Appendix  
This appendix describes the procedure for sending pure binary data over an  
RS-232 interface. The formatting described is used in the  
DIAG:DOWN:CHEC:MADD, DIAG:DOWN:CHEC:SADD, and  
DIAG:DRIV:LOAD:CHEC commands. this appendix contains the following  
main sections.  
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
Formatting Binary Data for RS-232 Transmission. . . . . . . . . . D-1  
Sending Binary Data Over RS-232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
1
Formatting Binary  
Data for RS-232  
Transmission  
The most straightforward way to send a block of data is to open the data file,  
read the next byte from the file, and send it to the System Instrument until you  
reach the end of file. However, binary data cannot be sent to the System  
Instrument as is. It must be converted into a format that will not conflict with the  
special characters that the RS-232 interface recognizes. This is done by sending  
only one half byte (a nibble) at a time. To prevent this nibble from being  
confused with a special character, bit 7 of the nibble is set to one. This gives all  
data bytes in the block values greater than 127 so they are not confused with  
ASCII characters. It also doubles the size of the file to be sent and the  
transmission time for the file. Since a transmission error that required  
retransmission of the entire data block would be very time consuming, a 3-bit  
error code (which allows for correction of single bit errors) is added to the  
transmission byte. The following format is sent for each nibble:  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
Correction Code  
Data  
The error correction code is based on the nibble of data sent. The easiest way to  
implement this code is to use table D-1. It is indexed based on the value of the  
nibble to send out, so there are 16 elements to the table.  
Sending Binary Data Over RS-232 D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table D-1. Correction Codes for RS-232 Transmission  
Data Value  
Correction Code Byte in Hex  
Byte in Decimal  
0
1
0
7
6
1
5
2
3
4
3
4
5
2
6
1
0
7
80h  
F1h  
128  
241  
226  
147  
212  
165  
182  
199  
184  
201  
218  
171  
236  
157  
142  
255  
2
E2h  
93h  
3
4
D4h  
A5h  
B6h  
C7h  
B8h  
C9h  
DAh  
ABh  
ECh  
9Dh  
8Eh  
FFh  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
1
Sending Binary  
Data Over RS-232  
The RS-232 interface differs from the GPIB interface in that there is no device  
addressing built into the interface definition. Device addressing must be done on  
top of the RS-232 functions. This addressing is done through the same  
mechanism as the terminal-based front panel, and must be done either by the  
transfer program or manually before starting the transfer program.  
Setting Up the There are two commands (SI - Select and Instrument and SA - Select Address)  
that can be used at the "Select an Instrument"interface. The "Select an  
Mainframe  
Instrument"interface can always be reached by sending the < CTRL-D>  
character (ASCII 4) over the RS-232 line. Once there, the System Instrument  
can be reached by sending the command "SI SYSTEM"followed by a carriage  
return. All output after this command will be directed to/from the System  
Instrument until another < CTRL-D> is received. The following sequence will  
make sure that the mainframe is set up and ready.  
1. Send < CTRL-D> (ASCII 4) to get to the "Select and Instrument"  
interface.  
2. Send "ST UNKNOWN"and a carriage return to insure that the terminal  
is set to dumb terminal mode.  
D-2 Sending Binary Data Over RS-232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Send "SI SYSTEM"and a carriage return to get the attention of the  
System Instrument.  
4. Send < CTRL-C> to clear the system.  
5. Send "*RST"and a carriage return to put the System Instrument in a  
known state.  
The program must then send the binary data. This block of data should include  
the command "DIAG:DOWN:CHEC" followed by the address to download to  
and an IEEE 488.2 arbitrary block header. This block header can be either  
definite or indefinite. The advantage of using an indefinite block header is that  
you do not need to know the length of the data block. The indefinite block  
header is # 0. With the DIAG:DOWN:CHEC command an indefinite block is  
terminated with the "!"character followed by a carriage return. The "!"character  
is not considered part of the block. A definite block only requires the ASCII  
carriage return character as terminator. The definite block starts with # . This is  
followed by a single digit that shows the number of digits in the length field,  
which is followed by the actual length of the block, not counting the header. For  
instance, a block of 1000 bytes would have a definite block header of # 41000.  
Due to the formatting required, the size of the block when using the  
DIAG:DOWN:CHEC command is twice the length of the data in bytes.  
Once the block header has been sent, the actual data is sent. Since the buffer  
size of the System Instrument RS-232 Interface is limited to 79 bytes, the buffer  
must be flushed (passed to an instrument parser) before it reaches 79 bytes. This  
can be done by sending a carriage return. The first carriage return should be  
included in the binary file after the buffer header. Sending it before this would  
result in the parser determining that there are not enough parameters and  
producing an error condition. Once transmission of the actual data begins, a  
carriage return should be included after every 78 bytes.  
NOTE  
The carriage returns are not considered part of the block count.  
After the last byte of data, there must be a carriage return to terminate the  
transmission for a definite block or a "!"and carriage return for an indefinite  
block.  
Sending Binary Data Over RS-232 D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4 Sending Binary Data Over RS-232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
terminal interface, 3-8  
Close channels (front panel), 2-5  
Command  
!
Abbreviated, 7-2  
Implied, 7-2  
Linking, 7-3  
Separator, 7-2  
3-Channel Universal Counter  
Menu (front panel), 2-26 - 2-27  
Menu (terminal interface), 3-38 - 3-39  
4-Channel Counter/Totalizer  
Menu (front panel), 2-24 - 2-25  
Menu (terminal interface), 3-36 - 3-37  
4-Channel D/A Converter  
Types, 7-1  
Command Errors, B-2  
Command Quick Reference, 7-75  
Command Reference, SCPI  
ABORt subsystem, 7-4  
Common Commands, 7-65  
DIAGnostic subsystem, 7-5 - 7-28  
INITiate subsystem, 7-29  
INITiate:IMMediate, 7-29  
SOURce subsystem, 7-30 - 7-31  
SOURce:PULSe:COUNt, 7-30  
SOURce:PULSe:COUNt?, 7-30  
SOURce:PULSe:PERiod, 7-31  
SOURce:PULSe:PERiod?, 7-31  
STATus subsystem, 7-32 - 7-34  
SYSTem subsystem, 7-35 - 7-50  
SYSTem:BEEP:IMMidiate, 7-35  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess, 7-36  
TRIGger subsystem, 7-51 - 7-53  
TRIGger:DELay, 7-51  
TRIGger:IMMediate, 7-52  
TRIGger:SLOPe, 7-52  
TRIGger:SLOPe?, 7-52  
TRIGger:SOURce, 7-52  
TRIGger:SOURce?, 7-53  
VXI subsystem, 7-54 - 7-64  
Commands  
Menu (front panel), 2-21  
Menu (terminal interface), 3-33  
5 1/2 Digit Multimeter  
Menu (front panel), 2-20  
Menu (terminal interface), 3-32  
60-second menu tutorial  
front panel, 2-2  
terminal interface, 3-3  
:DRIVer:LOAD, 7-17  
:DRIVer:LOAD:CHECked, 7-17  
A
Abbreviated Commands, 7-2  
ABORt subsystem, 7-4  
Allocating a user memory segment, 4-7  
B
Back Space key  
terminal interface, 3-15  
Back Space key (front panel), 2-11  
BEEPer:IMMediate, 7-35  
BOOT  
executing (front panel), 2-9  
executing (terminal interface), 3-13  
terminal interface, 3-19  
Common Command Format, 7-1  
Common Command reference, 7-65  
Common Command reference, all instruments  
*CLS, 7-66  
:COLD, 7-6  
:WARM, 7-7  
C
Cable  
RS-232, 5-1  
Caps Lock key  
*ESE, 7-66  
*ESE?, 7-67  
*ESR?, 7-67  
*IDN?, 7-68  
*LRN?, 7-68  
*OPC, 7-69  
*OPC?, 7-69  
*PSC, 7-69  
terminal interface, 3-15  
Caps Lock key (front panel), 2-11  
Changing the primary GPIB address, 4-3  
Clear-to-end key  
terminal interface, 3-15  
Clear-to-end key (front panel), 2-11  
Clearing Standard Operation Event Register Bits, 6-9  
Clearing status, 6-10  
*PSC?, 7-69  
*RCL, 7-70  
*RST, 7-70  
Close channels  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*SAV, 7-70  
*SRE, 7-70  
*SRE?, 7-71  
D
*STB?, 7-71  
*TRG, 7-71  
*TST?, 7-71  
*WAI, 7-71  
Data memory, mainframe, 4-6  
DATE, 7-48  
SYST:DATE, 7-48  
SYST:DATE?, 7-49  
Date, reading or setting, 1-5  
DATE?, 7-49  
DCL (device clear), 7-73  
Definition, instrument, 1-3  
DELay, 7-51  
TRIG:DELay, 7-51  
TRIG:DELay?, 7-51  
DELay?, 7-51  
Delete key  
Common Commands functional groupings, 7-65  
COMMunicate:GPIB  
:ADDRess, 7-36  
:ADDRess?, 7-36  
COMMunicate:SERial[0]  
:OWNer, 7-7  
:OWNer?, 7-8  
COMMunicate:SERial[n]  
:CONTrol:DTR, 7-37  
:CONTrol:DTR?, 7-38  
:CONTrol:RTS, 7-38  
:CONTrol:RTS?, 7-39  
:RECeive:BAUD, 7-39  
:RECeive:BAUD?, 7-39  
:RECeive:BITS, 7-40  
terminal interface, 3-14  
Delete key (front panel), 2-11  
Device clear (DCL), 7-73  
Device Driver  
manual download over GPIB, 5-11  
manual download over RS-232, 5-11  
preparing memory for download, 5-10  
Device driver RAM, 5-3  
:RECeive:BITS?, 7-40  
:RECeive:PACE:PROTocol, 7-41  
:RECeive:PACE:PROTocol?, 7-41  
:RECeive:PACE:THReshold:STARt, 7-42  
:RECeive:PACE:THReshold:STARt?, 7-42  
:RECeive:PACE:THReshold:STOP, 7-43  
:RECeive:PACE:THReshold:STOP?, 7-43  
:RECeive:PARity:CHECk, 7-44  
:RECeive:PARity:CHECk?, 7-44  
:RECeive:PARity:TYPE, 7-44 - 7-45  
:RECeive:PARity[:TYPE?], 7-46  
:RECeive:SBITs, 7-46  
Device Drivers  
checking status, 5-9  
Disks, 5-1  
download program configuration, 5-4  
downloading in GPIB systems with BASIC, 5-8  
downloading in GPIB systems with IBASIC, 5-7  
downloading in MS-DOS systems, 5-6  
downloading multiple drivers, 5-9  
editing the configuration file, 5-4  
memory configuration, 5-3  
Device-Specific Errors, B-2  
DIAGnostic subsystem, 7-5 - 7-28  
DIAG:BOOT:COLD, 7-6  
DIAG:BOOT:WARM, 7-7  
DIAG:COMM:SER[0]:OWN, 7-7  
DIAG:COMM:SER[0]:OWN?, 7-8  
DIAG:COMM:SER[n]:STOR, 7-8  
DIAG:DOWN:CHEC:SADD, 7-11 - 7-12  
DIAG:DOWN:CHEC[:MADD], 7-9 - 7-10  
DIAG:DOWN:SADD, 7-14  
DIAG:DOWN[:MADD], 7-13  
DIAG:DRAM:AVA?, 7-15  
DIAG:DRAM:CRE, 7-16  
DIAG:DRIVer:LOAD, 7-17  
DIAG:DRIVer:LOAD:CHEC, 7-17  
DIAG:INT:ACT, 7-19  
:RECeive:SBITs?, 7-47  
:STORe, 7-8  
:TRANsmit:AUTO, 7-47  
:TRANsmit:AUTO?, 7-47  
:TRANsmit:PACE:PROTocol, 7-48  
:TRANsmit:PACE:PROTocol?, 7-48  
COMMunicate:SERial[n] , 7-36  
Condition register, reading, 6-8  
CONFigure  
:DLADdress?, 7-54  
:DNUMber?, 7-56  
:HIERarchy:ALL?, 7-58  
:HIERarchy?, 7-57  
:INFormation:ALL?, 7-60  
:INFormation?, 7-58 - 7-59  
:NUMBer?, 7-60  
CONFigure:DLISt?, 7-55  
Configuring a Terminal, C-1 - C-5  
Connecting a terminal, C-1 - C-5  
Control keys, menu (terminal interface), 3-14  
DIAG:INT:PRI[n], 7-21  
DIAG:INT:PRI[n]?, 7-21  
DIAG:INT:RESP?, 7-22  
DIAG:INT:SET[n], 7-19  
DIAG:INT:SET[n]?, 7-20  
DIAG:NRAM:ADDR?, 7-23  
DIAG:NRAM:CRE, 7-23  
DIAG:NRAM:CRE?, 7-24  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAG:PEEK?, 7-24  
DIAG:POKE, 7-25  
messages, reading (front panel), 2-8  
SYST:ERR?, 7-49  
DIAG:RDIS:ADD?, 7-25  
DIAG:RDIS:CRE, 7-26  
Error Messages, B-1 - B-6  
Error Queue ,reading, B-1  
DIAG:RDIS:CRE?, 7-26  
DIAG:UPL:SADD?, 7-28  
DIAG:UPL[:MADD]?, 7-27  
DRIV:LIST:ROM?, 7-18  
DRIV:LIST?, 7-18  
Error Types, B-2  
ERRor?, 7-49  
Errors  
Command, B-2  
Device-Specific, B-2  
DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LIST:RAM?, 7-18  
DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LIST:ROM?, 7-18  
DIAGnostic:DRIVer:LIST?, 7-18  
Display  
instrument information (terminal interface), 3-5  
control/editing keys (front panel), 2-10  
instrument information (front panel), 2-3  
instrument logical addresses (front panel), 2-3  
instrument logical addresses (terminal interface), 3-5  
module type & description (front panel), 2-5  
module type & description (term. interface), 3-8  
DOWNload  
Execution, B-2  
Query, B-2  
Example  
Storing and retrieving data from mainframe memory, 4-7  
Allocating an NRAM segment, 4-8  
Continuous pacer out signal, 4-2  
interrupting when an error occurs, 6-11  
Pacing an external scanner, 4-2  
reading the date, 1-5  
reading the time, 1-5  
setting the date, 1-5  
setting the time, 1-5  
:CHECked:SADDress, 7-11 - 7-12  
:CHECked[:MADDress], 7-9 - 7-10  
:SADDress, 7-14  
Synchronizing an internal instrument to an external  
instrument, 4-4  
synchronizing computers using *OPC, 6-13  
synchronizing computers using *OPC?, 6-12  
Synchronizing internal/external instruments and the  
computer, 4-4  
[:MADDress], 7-13  
Download program, 5-4  
DOWNload, using, 4-9  
Downloading device drivers  
checking status, 5-9  
Using the Operation Status Group Registers, 6-9  
Using UPLoad and DOWNload, 4-10  
Example: Reading Error Queue, B-1  
Executing commands (front panel), 2-9  
Executing commands (terminal interface), 3-13  
Execution Errors, B-2  
hardware handshake, 5-12  
in GPIB systems with BASIC, 5-8  
in GPIB systems with IBASIC, 5-7  
in MS-DOS systems, 5-6  
manually over GPIB, 5-11  
manually over RS-232, 5-11  
manually using hardware handshake, 5-13  
manually using software handshake, 5-14  
multiple device drivers, 5-9  
pacing data, 5-12  
External computer, interrupting, 6-10  
External computer/instruments, synchronizing, 6-12  
preparing memory, 5-10  
software handshake, 5-12  
DRAM, 5-3  
:AVAilable?, 7-15  
:CREate, 7-16  
:CREate?, 7-16  
Drivers  
listing, 7-18  
E
Editing  
VXIDLD.CFG, 5-4  
Editing keys  
front panel, 2-10  
Editing keys (terminal interface), 3-14  
Editing:the configuration file, 5-4  
Error  
messages, reading, 3-12  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interface clear (IFC), 7-72  
Internal/external instruments, synchronizing, 4-3  
INTerrupt  
F
:ACTivate, 7-19  
:PRIority[n], 7-21  
:PRIority[n]?, 7-21  
:RESPonse?, 7-22  
:SETup[n], 7-19  
:SETup[n]?, 7-20  
Files:VXIDLD.CFG, 5-4  
Format  
Common Command, 7-1  
SCPI Command, 7-1  
Front panel  
features, 2-1  
menu tutorial, 2-2  
menus, 2-2  
Interrupting external computer, 6-10  
Introductory programming examples, 1-4  
K
G
Key descriptions (front panel), 2-10  
Key descriptions, General, 3-14  
Keys  
GET (group execute trigger), 7-72  
Go to local (GTL), 7-72  
Group execute trigger (GET), 7-72  
GTL (go to local), 7-72  
editing (terminal interface), 3-14  
menu (front panel), 2-10  
menu (terminal interface), 3-14  
menu control (terminal interface), 3-14  
H
Hints, programming, 6-1  
How to  
L
display instrument information (front panel), 2-3  
display instrument information (terminal interface), 3-5  
display instrument ladd (terminal interface), 3-5  
display instrument ladd(front panel), 2-3  
reset (reboot) the mainframe (front panel), 2-3  
reset (reboot) the mainframe (terminal interface), 3-5  
set or read the system GPIB address, 3-5  
set or read the system GPIB address (front panel), 2-3  
GPIB message reference, 7-72  
Left arrow key  
terminal interface, 3-14  
Left arrow key (front panel), 2-10  
Linking Commands, 7-3  
LLO (local lockout), 7-73  
Local lockout (LLO), 7-73  
Logical addresses  
displaying (front panel), 2-3  
displaying (terminal interface), 3-5  
instrument, 1-4  
I
M
IBASIC, Users Note, 4-7  
IFC (interface clear), 7-72  
IMMediate  
Mainframe  
data memory, 4-6  
description, 1-1  
BEEP:IMM, 7-35  
INIT:IMM, 7-29  
TRIG:IMM, 7-52  
memory, optional, 1-1  
Memory  
device driver RAM, 5-3  
Memory, mainframe, 4-6  
Menu  
Implied Commands, 7-2  
In case of difficulty  
terminal interface, 3-23  
In case of difficulty (front panel), 2-12  
INITiate subsystem, 7-29  
Instrument  
using a terminal without, 3-21  
Menu (front panel)  
3-Channel Universal Counter, 2-26 - 2-27  
4-Channel Counter/Totalizer, 2-24 - 2-25  
Quad 8-Bit Digital Input/Output, 2-22  
4-Channel D/A Converter, 2-21  
5 1/2 Digit Multimeter, 2-20  
instrument (front panel), 2-13  
keys, 2-10  
Scanning Voltmeter, 2-18 - 2-19  
Switchbox, 2-16  
System Instrument, 2-14 - 2-15  
Control Keys (front panel), 2-11  
Control Keys (terminal interface), 3-15  
definition, 1-3  
logical addresses, 1-4  
menus (front panel), 2-13  
menus (terminal interface), 3-25  
menus, using, 3-8  
menus, using (front panel), 2-5  
Instrument secondary addresses, 1-4  
Instruments, synchronizing, 4-3  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tutorial, 2-2  
Programming examples, introductory, 1-4  
Programming hints, 6-1  
PULSe  
Menu (terminal interface)  
3-Channel Universal Counter, 3-38 - 3-39  
4-Channel Counter/Totalizer, 3-36 - 3-37  
Quad 8-Bit Digital Input/Output, 3-34  
4-Channel D/A Converter, 3-33  
5 1/2 Digit Multimeter, 3-32  
control keys, 3-14  
:COUNt, 7-30  
:COUNt?, 7-30  
:PERiod, 7-31  
:PERiod?, 7-31  
instrument, 3-25  
keys, 3-14  
Q
Scanning Voltmeter, 3-30 - 3-31  
Switchbox, 3-28  
System Instrument, 3-26 - 3-27  
tutorial, 3-3  
Quad 8-Bit Digital Input/Output  
Menu (front panel), 2-22  
Menu (terminal interface), 3-34  
Query Errors, B-2  
QUEStionable, 7-34  
Quick Reference, Command, 7-75  
Mode, monitor, 3-11  
Mode, monitor (front panel), 2-8  
Modules, unassigned, 1-4  
Monitor  
R
a Switchbox (front panel), 2-5  
a Switchbox (terminal interface), 3-8  
mode, 3-11  
RDISK, 5-5  
:ADDress?, 7-25  
:CREate, 7-26  
:CREate?, 7-26  
mode (front panel), 2-8  
Multiple device drivers, 5-9  
READ?, 7-60  
Reading  
N
error messages (front panel), 2-8  
error messages (terminal interface), 3-12  
the Condition register, 6-8  
the Status Byte register, 6-4  
the system GPIB address, 3-5  
the system GPIB address (front panel), 2-3  
Reading Instruments Error Queue, B-1  
Reading the date, 1-5  
Non-volatile user memory, 4-7  
NRAM, 5-5  
:ADDRess?, 7-23  
:CREate, 7-23  
:CREate?, 7-24  
address, 4-7  
allocating a segment, 4-7  
locating the segment, 4-7  
user non-volatile memory, 4-7  
Reading the time, 1-5  
Readings  
retrieving from mainframe memory, 4-7  
storing in mainframe memory, 4-7  
Reboot the mainframe  
O
Open and close channels  
terminal interface, 3-8  
Open and close channels (front panel), 2-5  
OPERation  
terminal interface, 3-5  
Reboot the mainframe (front panel), 2-3  
Reference, Common Commands, 7-65  
register  
:CONDition?, 7-32  
:READ?, 7-61  
:ENABle, 7-32  
:WRITe?, 7-62  
:ENABle?, 7-33  
VXI:READ?, 7-60  
[:EVENt]?, 7-33  
VXI:WRIT, 7-64  
Optional mainframe memory, 1-1  
Other Terminals, non-supported, 3-19  
Register, Status Byte, 6-4  
Remote (GPIB message), 7-74  
Reset  
(reboot) the mainframe (front panel), 2-3  
(reboot) the mainframe (terminal interface), 3-5  
a switch module (front panel), 2-5  
a switch module (terminal interface), 3-8  
Retrieving data from mainframe memory, 4-7  
Right arrow key  
P
Pacer, using, 4-1  
Pacing data for manual download, 5-12  
PEEK?, 7-24  
POKE, 7-25  
PRESet, 7-34  
terminal interface, 3-14  
RS-232 Cable, 5-1  
Primary GPIB address, changing, 4-3  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STATus subsystem, 7-32 - 7-34  
STAT:OPER:COND?, 7-32  
S
STAT:OPER:ENAB, 7-32  
STAT:OPER:ENAB?, 7-33  
STAT:OPER[:EVEN]?, 7-33  
STAT:PRES, 7-34  
STAT:QUES, 7-34  
SA, terminal interface command, 3-21  
Scan channels  
(front panel), 2-5  
Switchbox, terminal interface, 3-8  
Scanning  
Voltmeter Menu (front panel), 2-18 - 2-19  
Voltmeter Menu (terminal interface), 3-30 - 3-31  
SCPI Commands, 7-1  
Status system structure, 6-2  
Status, clearing, 6-10  
Status, system structure, 6-2  
Storing and retrieving data from mainframe memory, 4-7  
Subsystem  
Format, 7-1  
Reference, 7-4  
ABORT, 7-4  
DIAGnostic, 7-5 - 7-28  
INITiate, 7-29  
SOURce, 7-30 - 7-31  
STATus, 7-32 - 7-34  
SYSTem, 7-35 - 7-50  
TRIGger, 7-51 - 7-53  
VXI, 7-54 - 7-64  
SDC (selected device clear), 7-73  
Secondary addresses, instrument, 1-4  
SELect, 7-63  
Select Address command (terminal interface), 3-21  
Select Instrument command (terminal interface), 3-21  
SELect?, 7-63  
Selected device clear (SDC), 7-73  
Selecting  
instruments, without menus, 3-21  
the Switchbox (front panel), 2-5  
the Switchbox (terminal interface), 3-8  
Separator  
Switchbox  
close channels (front panel), 2-5  
close channels (terminal interface), 3-8  
display module type & description (front panel), 2-5  
display module type & description (term. interface), 3-8  
Menu (front panel), 2-16  
Command, 7-2  
Serial poll (SPOLL), 7-74  
Service request  
Menu (terminal interface), 3-28  
monitoring (front panel), 2-5  
monitoring (terminal interface), 3-8  
open and close channels (front panel), 2-5  
open and close channels (terminal interface), 3-8  
scan channels (front panel), 2-5  
scan channels (terminal interface), 3-8  
selecting (front panel), 2-5  
enable register, 6-5  
Service request enable register, 6-5  
clearing, 6-5  
Set or read the system GPIB address  
terminal interface, 3-5  
Set or read the system GPIB address (front panel), 2-3  
Setting the date, 1-5  
selecting (terminal interface), 3-8  
Synchronizing  
internal/external instruments, 4-3  
Synchronizing external computer/instruments, 6-12  
Syntax, Variable Command, 7-2  
System Instrument, 7-1  
Menu (front panel), 2-14 - 2-15  
Menu (terminal interface), 3-26 - 3-27  
System Instrument menu, 3-5  
System Instrument menu (front panel), 2-3  
SYSTem subsystem, 7-35 - 7-50  
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR?, 7-36  
SYST:COMM:SER[n] :REC:PAR:TYPE, 7-44 - 7-45  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:CONT:DTR, 7-37  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:CONT:DTR?, 7-38  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:CONT:RTS?, 7-39  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:BAUD, 7-39  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:BAUD?, 7-39  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:BITS, 7-40  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:BITS?, 7-40  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PACE:PROT, 7-41  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PACE:PROT?, 7-41  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PACE:THR:STAR, 7-42  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PACE:THR:STAR?, 7-42  
Setting the time, 1-5  
Shift key  
terminal interface, 3-15  
Shift key (front panel), 2-11  
SI, terminal interface command, 3-21  
SLOPe, TRIGger:SLOPe, 7-52  
SLOPe?, TRIGger:SLOPe?, 7-52  
SOURce subsystem, 7-30 - 7-31  
SOURce, TRIG:SOUR, 7-52  
SOURce?, TRIG:SOUR?, 7-53  
SPOLL (serial poll), 7-74  
ST, terminal interface command, 3-20  
Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments,  
SCPI, 7-4  
Standard Event Status bits, unmasking, 6-6  
Standard Event Status Register, 6-6  
reading, 6-7  
Standard Event Status Register (table), 6-6  
Standard Operation Status Group  
Condition register, 6-7  
Condition register (table), 6-8  
Status Byte register, 6-3 - 6-4  
Status Byte Register, reading, 6-4  
Index-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PACE:THR:STOP, 7-43  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PACE:THR:STOP?, 7-43  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PAR:CHEC, 7-44  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PAR:CHEC?, 7-44  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:PAR[:TYPE?], 7-46  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:SBIT, 7-46  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:REC:SBIT?, 7-47  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:TRAN:AUTO, 7-47  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:TRAN:AUTO?, 7-47  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:TRAN:PACE:PROT, 7-48  
SYST:COMM:SER[n]:TRAN:PACE:PROT?, 7-48  
SYST:COMM:SERial[n]:CONT:RTS, 7-38  
SYST:DATE, 7-48  
User memory, non-volatile, 4-7  
Using  
:DOWNload and :UPLoad, 4-9  
a terminal without menus, 3-21  
instrument menus (front panel), 2-5  
instrument menus (terminal interface), 3-8  
menus, 2-2, 3-3  
Operation Status Group Registers, 6-9  
Other Terminals, 3-19  
Supported Terminals, 3-16  
the Pacer, 4-1  
V
SYST:DATE?, 7-49  
SYST:ERRor?, 7-49  
SYST:TIME, 7-50  
SYST:TIME?, 7-50  
SYST:VERS?, 7-50  
Variable Command Syntax, 7-2  
VERSion?, 7-50  
VXI subsystem, 7-54 - 7-64  
VXI:CONF:DLAD?, 7-54  
VXI:CONF:DLIS?, 7-55  
VXI:CONF:DNUM?, 7-56  
VXI:CONF:HIER:ALL?, 7-58  
VXI:CONF:HIER?, 7-57  
VXI:CONF:INF:ALL?, 7-60  
VXI:CONF:INF?, 7-58 - 7-59  
VXI:CONF:NUMB?, 7-60  
VXI:READ?, 7-60  
T
Terminal  
configuring, C-1 - C-5  
connecting, C-1 - C-5  
Terminal interface  
commands, 3-19  
commands, SA, 3-21  
commands, SI, 3-21  
commands, ST, 3-20  
features, 3-2  
VXI:REG:READ?, 7-61  
VXI:SEL, 7-63  
VXI:SEL?, 7-63  
VXI:WRIT, 7-64  
menu tutorial, 3-3  
menus, 3-3  
VXI Subsystem, 7-62  
VXIDLD.CFG, 5-4  
TIME, 7-50  
SYST:TIME, 7-50  
SYST:TIME?, 7-50  
W
Time, reading or setting, 1-5  
TIME?, 7-50  
WRITe, 7-64  
TRIG:SOURce, 7-52  
TRIG:SOURce?, 7-53  
TRIGger subsystem, 7-51 - 7-53  
trigger system  
ABORt subsystem, 7-4  
INITiate subsystem, 7-29  
TRIGger subsystem, 7-51 - 7-53  
TRIGger:IMMediate, 7-52  
TRIGger:SLOPe, 7-52  
TRIGger:SLOPe?, 7-52  
U
Unassigned modules, 1-4  
Unmasking Standard Event Status bits, 6-6  
Unmasking Standard Operation Event Register Bits, 6-8  
UPLoad  
:SADDress?, 7-28  
[:MADDress]?, 7-27  
UPLoad, using, 4-9  
Index-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

3M Printer Accessories 740B30 User Manual
ADTRAN Switch DSU III S2W User Manual
Aiphone Speaker System Model LC 3S User Manual
Atlas Model Vehicle 520099 User Manual
Audiovox Remote Starter PRO 9051 User Manual
Audiovox Stereo Amplifier BTR120 User Manual
Aztech Systems Network Card WL230USB User Manual
Behringer DJ Equipment DJX750 User Manual
Beko Iron BKK2174 User Manual
Beko MP3 Player MP 230 User Manual